mirror of
				https://github.com/mozilla/gecko-dev.git
				synced 2025-11-04 02:09:05 +02:00 
			
		
		
		
	
		
			
				
	
	
		
			7500 lines
		
	
	
	
		
			246 KiB
		
	
	
	
		
			C++
		
	
	
	
	
	
			
		
		
	
	
			7500 lines
		
	
	
	
		
			246 KiB
		
	
	
	
		
			C++
		
	
	
	
	
	
/* -*- Mode: C++; tab-width: 8; indent-tabs-mode: nil; c-basic-offset: 2 -*- */
 | 
						|
/* vim: set ts=8 sts=2 et sw=2 tw=80: */
 | 
						|
/* This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public
 | 
						|
 * License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this
 | 
						|
 * file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/. */
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
#include "mozilla/dom/HTMLInputElement.h"
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
#include "mozilla/ArrayUtils.h"
 | 
						|
#include "mozilla/AsyncEventDispatcher.h"
 | 
						|
#include "mozilla/BasePrincipal.h"
 | 
						|
#include "mozilla/DebugOnly.h"
 | 
						|
#include "mozilla/Components.h"
 | 
						|
#include "mozilla/dom/AutocompleteInfoBinding.h"
 | 
						|
#include "mozilla/dom/BlobImpl.h"
 | 
						|
#include "mozilla/dom/Directory.h"
 | 
						|
#include "mozilla/dom/DocumentOrShadowRoot.h"
 | 
						|
#include "mozilla/dom/ElementBinding.h"
 | 
						|
#include "mozilla/dom/FileSystemUtils.h"
 | 
						|
#include "mozilla/dom/FormData.h"
 | 
						|
#include "mozilla/dom/GetFilesHelper.h"
 | 
						|
#include "mozilla/dom/NumericInputTypes.h"
 | 
						|
#include "mozilla/dom/WindowContext.h"
 | 
						|
#include "mozilla/dom/InputType.h"
 | 
						|
#include "mozilla/dom/UserActivation.h"
 | 
						|
#include "mozilla/dom/MutationEventBinding.h"
 | 
						|
#include "mozilla/dom/WheelEventBinding.h"
 | 
						|
#include "mozilla/dom/WindowGlobalChild.h"
 | 
						|
#include "mozilla/EventStateManager.h"
 | 
						|
#include "mozilla/Maybe.h"
 | 
						|
#include "mozilla/MouseEvents.h"
 | 
						|
#include "mozilla/PresShell.h"
 | 
						|
#include "mozilla/StaticPrefs_dom.h"
 | 
						|
#include "mozilla/StaticPrefs_signon.h"
 | 
						|
#include "mozilla/TextUtils.h"
 | 
						|
#include "mozilla/Try.h"
 | 
						|
#include "nsAttrValueInlines.h"
 | 
						|
#include "nsCRTGlue.h"
 | 
						|
#include "nsIFilePicker.h"
 | 
						|
#include "nsNetUtil.h"
 | 
						|
#include "nsQueryObject.h"
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
#include "HTMLDataListElement.h"
 | 
						|
#include "HTMLFormSubmissionConstants.h"
 | 
						|
#include "mozilla/Telemetry.h"
 | 
						|
#include "nsBaseCommandController.h"
 | 
						|
#include "nsIStringBundle.h"
 | 
						|
#include "nsFocusManager.h"
 | 
						|
#include "nsColorControlFrame.h"
 | 
						|
#include "nsNumberControlFrame.h"
 | 
						|
#include "nsSearchControlFrame.h"
 | 
						|
#include "nsPIDOMWindow.h"
 | 
						|
#include "nsRepeatService.h"
 | 
						|
#include "mozilla/dom/ProgressEvent.h"
 | 
						|
#include "nsGkAtoms.h"
 | 
						|
#include "nsStyleConsts.h"
 | 
						|
#include "nsPresContext.h"
 | 
						|
#include "nsIFormControl.h"
 | 
						|
#include "mozilla/dom/Document.h"
 | 
						|
#include "mozilla/dom/HTMLDataListElement.h"
 | 
						|
#include "mozilla/dom/HTMLOptionElement.h"
 | 
						|
#include "nsIFormControlFrame.h"
 | 
						|
#include "nsITextControlFrame.h"
 | 
						|
#include "nsIFrame.h"
 | 
						|
#include "nsRangeFrame.h"
 | 
						|
#include "nsError.h"
 | 
						|
#include "nsIEditor.h"
 | 
						|
#include "nsIPromptCollection.h"
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
#include "mozilla/PresState.h"
 | 
						|
#include "nsLinebreakConverter.h"  //to strip out carriage returns
 | 
						|
#include "nsReadableUtils.h"
 | 
						|
#include "nsUnicharUtils.h"
 | 
						|
#include "nsLayoutUtils.h"
 | 
						|
#include "nsVariant.h"
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
#include "mozilla/ContentEvents.h"
 | 
						|
#include "mozilla/EventDispatcher.h"
 | 
						|
#include "mozilla/MappedDeclarationsBuilder.h"
 | 
						|
#include "mozilla/InternalMutationEvent.h"
 | 
						|
#include "mozilla/TextControlState.h"
 | 
						|
#include "mozilla/TextEditor.h"
 | 
						|
#include "mozilla/TextEvents.h"
 | 
						|
#include "mozilla/TouchEvents.h"
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
#include <algorithm>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
// input type=radio
 | 
						|
#include "mozilla/dom/RadioGroupContainer.h"
 | 
						|
#include "nsIRadioVisitor.h"
 | 
						|
#include "nsRadioVisitor.h"
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
// input type=file
 | 
						|
#include "mozilla/dom/FileSystemEntry.h"
 | 
						|
#include "mozilla/dom/FileSystem.h"
 | 
						|
#include "mozilla/dom/File.h"
 | 
						|
#include "mozilla/dom/FileList.h"
 | 
						|
#include "nsIFile.h"
 | 
						|
#include "nsDirectoryServiceDefs.h"
 | 
						|
#include "nsIContentPrefService2.h"
 | 
						|
#include "nsIMIMEService.h"
 | 
						|
#include "nsIObserverService.h"
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
// input type=image
 | 
						|
#include "nsImageLoadingContent.h"
 | 
						|
#include "imgRequestProxy.h"
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
#include "mozAutoDocUpdate.h"
 | 
						|
#include "nsContentCreatorFunctions.h"
 | 
						|
#include "nsContentUtils.h"
 | 
						|
#include "mozilla/dom/DirectionalityUtils.h"
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
#include "mozilla/LookAndFeel.h"
 | 
						|
#include "mozilla/Preferences.h"
 | 
						|
#include "mozilla/MathAlgorithms.h"
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
#include <limits>
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
#include "nsIColorPicker.h"
 | 
						|
#include "nsIStringEnumerator.h"
 | 
						|
#include "HTMLSplitOnSpacesTokenizer.h"
 | 
						|
#include "nsIMIMEInfo.h"
 | 
						|
#include "nsFrameSelection.h"
 | 
						|
#include "nsXULControllers.h"
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
// input type=date
 | 
						|
#include "js/Date.h"
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
NS_IMPL_NS_NEW_HTML_ELEMENT_CHECK_PARSER(Input)
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
// XXX align=left, hspace, vspace, border? other nav4 attrs
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
namespace mozilla::dom {
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
// First bits are needed for the control type.
 | 
						|
#define NS_OUTER_ACTIVATE_EVENT (1 << 9)
 | 
						|
#define NS_ORIGINAL_CHECKED_VALUE (1 << 10)
 | 
						|
// (1 << 11 is unused)
 | 
						|
#define NS_ORIGINAL_INDETERMINATE_VALUE (1 << 12)
 | 
						|
#define NS_PRE_HANDLE_BLUR_EVENT (1 << 13)
 | 
						|
#define NS_IN_SUBMIT_CLICK (1 << 15)
 | 
						|
#define NS_CONTROL_TYPE(bits)                                              \
 | 
						|
  ((bits) & ~(NS_OUTER_ACTIVATE_EVENT | NS_ORIGINAL_CHECKED_VALUE |        \
 | 
						|
              NS_ORIGINAL_INDETERMINATE_VALUE | NS_PRE_HANDLE_BLUR_EVENT | \
 | 
						|
              NS_IN_SUBMIT_CLICK))
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
// whether textfields should be selected once focused:
 | 
						|
//  -1: no, 1: yes, 0: uninitialized
 | 
						|
static int32_t gSelectTextFieldOnFocus;
 | 
						|
UploadLastDir* HTMLInputElement::gUploadLastDir;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
static const nsAttrValue::EnumTable kInputTypeTable[] = {
 | 
						|
    {"button", FormControlType::InputButton},
 | 
						|
    {"checkbox", FormControlType::InputCheckbox},
 | 
						|
    {"color", FormControlType::InputColor},
 | 
						|
    {"date", FormControlType::InputDate},
 | 
						|
    {"datetime-local", FormControlType::InputDatetimeLocal},
 | 
						|
    {"email", FormControlType::InputEmail},
 | 
						|
    {"file", FormControlType::InputFile},
 | 
						|
    {"hidden", FormControlType::InputHidden},
 | 
						|
    {"reset", FormControlType::InputReset},
 | 
						|
    {"image", FormControlType::InputImage},
 | 
						|
    {"month", FormControlType::InputMonth},
 | 
						|
    {"number", FormControlType::InputNumber},
 | 
						|
    {"password", FormControlType::InputPassword},
 | 
						|
    {"radio", FormControlType::InputRadio},
 | 
						|
    {"range", FormControlType::InputRange},
 | 
						|
    {"search", FormControlType::InputSearch},
 | 
						|
    {"submit", FormControlType::InputSubmit},
 | 
						|
    {"tel", FormControlType::InputTel},
 | 
						|
    {"time", FormControlType::InputTime},
 | 
						|
    {"url", FormControlType::InputUrl},
 | 
						|
    {"week", FormControlType::InputWeek},
 | 
						|
    // "text" must be last for ParseAttribute to work right.  If you add things
 | 
						|
    // before it, please update kInputDefaultType.
 | 
						|
    {"text", FormControlType::InputText},
 | 
						|
    {nullptr, 0}};
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
// Default type is 'text'.
 | 
						|
static const nsAttrValue::EnumTable* kInputDefaultType =
 | 
						|
    &kInputTypeTable[ArrayLength(kInputTypeTable) - 2];
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
static const nsAttrValue::EnumTable kCaptureTable[] = {
 | 
						|
    {"user", nsIFilePicker::captureUser},
 | 
						|
    {"environment", nsIFilePicker::captureEnv},
 | 
						|
    {"", nsIFilePicker::captureDefault},
 | 
						|
    {nullptr, nsIFilePicker::captureNone}};
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
static const nsAttrValue::EnumTable* kCaptureDefault = &kCaptureTable[2];
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
using namespace blink;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
constexpr Decimal HTMLInputElement::kStepScaleFactorDate(86400000_d);
 | 
						|
constexpr Decimal HTMLInputElement::kStepScaleFactorNumberRange(1_d);
 | 
						|
constexpr Decimal HTMLInputElement::kStepScaleFactorTime(1000_d);
 | 
						|
constexpr Decimal HTMLInputElement::kStepScaleFactorMonth(1_d);
 | 
						|
constexpr Decimal HTMLInputElement::kStepScaleFactorWeek(7 * 86400000_d);
 | 
						|
constexpr Decimal HTMLInputElement::kDefaultStepBase(0_d);
 | 
						|
constexpr Decimal HTMLInputElement::kDefaultStepBaseWeek(-259200000_d);
 | 
						|
constexpr Decimal HTMLInputElement::kDefaultStep(1_d);
 | 
						|
constexpr Decimal HTMLInputElement::kDefaultStepTime(60_d);
 | 
						|
constexpr Decimal HTMLInputElement::kStepAny(0_d);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
const double HTMLInputElement::kMinimumYear = 1;
 | 
						|
const double HTMLInputElement::kMaximumYear = 275760;
 | 
						|
const double HTMLInputElement::kMaximumWeekInMaximumYear = 37;
 | 
						|
const double HTMLInputElement::kMaximumDayInMaximumYear = 13;
 | 
						|
const double HTMLInputElement::kMaximumMonthInMaximumYear = 9;
 | 
						|
const double HTMLInputElement::kMaximumWeekInYear = 53;
 | 
						|
const double HTMLInputElement::kMsPerDay = 24 * 60 * 60 * 1000;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
// An helper class for the dispatching of the 'change' event.
 | 
						|
// This class is used when the FilePicker finished its task (or when files and
 | 
						|
// directories are set by some chrome/test only method).
 | 
						|
// The task of this class is to postpone the dispatching of 'change' and 'input'
 | 
						|
// events at the end of the exploration of the directories.
 | 
						|
class DispatchChangeEventCallback final : public GetFilesCallback {
 | 
						|
 public:
 | 
						|
  explicit DispatchChangeEventCallback(HTMLInputElement* aInputElement)
 | 
						|
      : mInputElement(aInputElement) {
 | 
						|
    MOZ_ASSERT(aInputElement);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  virtual void Callback(
 | 
						|
      nsresult aStatus,
 | 
						|
      const FallibleTArray<RefPtr<BlobImpl>>& aBlobImpls) override {
 | 
						|
    if (!mInputElement->GetOwnerGlobal()) {
 | 
						|
      return;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    nsTArray<OwningFileOrDirectory> array;
 | 
						|
    for (uint32_t i = 0; i < aBlobImpls.Length(); ++i) {
 | 
						|
      OwningFileOrDirectory* element = array.AppendElement();
 | 
						|
      RefPtr<File> file =
 | 
						|
          File::Create(mInputElement->GetOwnerGlobal(), aBlobImpls[i]);
 | 
						|
      if (NS_WARN_IF(!file)) {
 | 
						|
        return;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      element->SetAsFile() = file;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    mInputElement->SetFilesOrDirectories(array, true);
 | 
						|
    Unused << NS_WARN_IF(NS_FAILED(DispatchEvents()));
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  MOZ_CAN_RUN_SCRIPT_BOUNDARY
 | 
						|
  nsresult DispatchEvents() {
 | 
						|
    RefPtr<HTMLInputElement> inputElement(mInputElement);
 | 
						|
    nsresult rv = nsContentUtils::DispatchInputEvent(inputElement);
 | 
						|
    NS_WARNING_ASSERTION(NS_SUCCEEDED(rv), "Failed to dispatch input event");
 | 
						|
    mInputElement->SetUserInteracted(true);
 | 
						|
    rv = nsContentUtils::DispatchTrustedEvent(mInputElement->OwnerDoc(),
 | 
						|
                                              mInputElement, u"change"_ns,
 | 
						|
                                              CanBubble::eYes, Cancelable::eNo);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    return rv;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
 private:
 | 
						|
  RefPtr<HTMLInputElement> mInputElement;
 | 
						|
};
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
struct HTMLInputElement::FileData {
 | 
						|
  /**
 | 
						|
   * The value of the input if it is a file input. This is the list of files or
 | 
						|
   * directories DOM objects used when uploading a file. It is vital that this
 | 
						|
   * is kept separate from mValue so that it won't be possible to 'leak' the
 | 
						|
   * value from a text-input to a file-input. Additionally, the logic for this
 | 
						|
   * value is kept as simple as possible to avoid accidental errors where the
 | 
						|
   * wrong filename is used.  Therefor the list of filenames is always owned by
 | 
						|
   * this member, never by the frame. Whenever the frame wants to change the
 | 
						|
   * filename it has to call SetFilesOrDirectories to update this member.
 | 
						|
   */
 | 
						|
  nsTArray<OwningFileOrDirectory> mFilesOrDirectories;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  RefPtr<GetFilesHelper> mGetFilesRecursiveHelper;
 | 
						|
  RefPtr<GetFilesHelper> mGetFilesNonRecursiveHelper;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  /**
 | 
						|
   * Hack for bug 1086684: Stash the .value when we're a file picker.
 | 
						|
   */
 | 
						|
  nsString mFirstFilePath;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  RefPtr<FileList> mFileList;
 | 
						|
  Sequence<RefPtr<FileSystemEntry>> mEntries;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  nsString mStaticDocFileList;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  void ClearGetFilesHelpers() {
 | 
						|
    if (mGetFilesRecursiveHelper) {
 | 
						|
      mGetFilesRecursiveHelper->Unlink();
 | 
						|
      mGetFilesRecursiveHelper = nullptr;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    if (mGetFilesNonRecursiveHelper) {
 | 
						|
      mGetFilesNonRecursiveHelper->Unlink();
 | 
						|
      mGetFilesNonRecursiveHelper = nullptr;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Cycle Collection support.
 | 
						|
  void Traverse(nsCycleCollectionTraversalCallback& cb) {
 | 
						|
    FileData* tmp = this;
 | 
						|
    NS_IMPL_CYCLE_COLLECTION_TRAVERSE(mFilesOrDirectories)
 | 
						|
    NS_IMPL_CYCLE_COLLECTION_TRAVERSE(mFileList)
 | 
						|
    NS_IMPL_CYCLE_COLLECTION_TRAVERSE(mEntries)
 | 
						|
    if (mGetFilesRecursiveHelper) {
 | 
						|
      mGetFilesRecursiveHelper->Traverse(cb);
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    if (mGetFilesNonRecursiveHelper) {
 | 
						|
      mGetFilesNonRecursiveHelper->Traverse(cb);
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  void Unlink() {
 | 
						|
    FileData* tmp = this;
 | 
						|
    NS_IMPL_CYCLE_COLLECTION_UNLINK(mFilesOrDirectories)
 | 
						|
    NS_IMPL_CYCLE_COLLECTION_UNLINK(mFileList)
 | 
						|
    NS_IMPL_CYCLE_COLLECTION_UNLINK(mEntries)
 | 
						|
    ClearGetFilesHelpers();
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
};
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
HTMLInputElement::nsFilePickerShownCallback::nsFilePickerShownCallback(
 | 
						|
    HTMLInputElement* aInput, nsIFilePicker* aFilePicker)
 | 
						|
    : mFilePicker(aFilePicker), mInput(aInput) {}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
NS_IMPL_ISUPPORTS(UploadLastDir::ContentPrefCallback, nsIContentPrefCallback2)
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
NS_IMETHODIMP
 | 
						|
UploadLastDir::ContentPrefCallback::HandleCompletion(uint16_t aReason) {
 | 
						|
  nsCOMPtr<nsIFile> localFile;
 | 
						|
  nsAutoString prefStr;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (aReason == nsIContentPrefCallback2::COMPLETE_ERROR || !mResult) {
 | 
						|
    Preferences::GetString("dom.input.fallbackUploadDir", prefStr);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (prefStr.IsEmpty() && mResult) {
 | 
						|
    nsCOMPtr<nsIVariant> pref;
 | 
						|
    mResult->GetValue(getter_AddRefs(pref));
 | 
						|
    pref->GetAsAString(prefStr);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (!prefStr.IsEmpty()) {
 | 
						|
    localFile = do_CreateInstance(NS_LOCAL_FILE_CONTRACTID);
 | 
						|
    if (localFile && NS_WARN_IF(NS_FAILED(localFile->InitWithPath(prefStr)))) {
 | 
						|
      localFile = nullptr;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (localFile) {
 | 
						|
    mFilePicker->SetDisplayDirectory(localFile);
 | 
						|
  } else {
 | 
						|
    // If no custom directory was set through the pref, default to
 | 
						|
    // "desktop" directory for each platform.
 | 
						|
    mFilePicker->SetDisplaySpecialDirectory(
 | 
						|
        NS_LITERAL_STRING_FROM_CSTRING(NS_OS_DESKTOP_DIR));
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  mFilePicker->Open(mFpCallback);
 | 
						|
  return NS_OK;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
NS_IMETHODIMP
 | 
						|
UploadLastDir::ContentPrefCallback::HandleResult(nsIContentPref* pref) {
 | 
						|
  mResult = pref;
 | 
						|
  return NS_OK;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
NS_IMETHODIMP
 | 
						|
UploadLastDir::ContentPrefCallback::HandleError(nsresult error) {
 | 
						|
  // HandleCompletion is always called (even with HandleError was called),
 | 
						|
  // so we don't need to do anything special here.
 | 
						|
  return NS_OK;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
namespace {
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/**
 | 
						|
 * This may return nullptr if the DOM File's implementation of
 | 
						|
 * File::mozFullPathInternal does not successfully return a non-empty
 | 
						|
 * string that is a valid path. This can happen on Firefox OS, for example,
 | 
						|
 * where the file picker can create Blobs.
 | 
						|
 */
 | 
						|
static already_AddRefed<nsIFile> LastUsedDirectory(
 | 
						|
    const OwningFileOrDirectory& aData) {
 | 
						|
  if (aData.IsFile()) {
 | 
						|
    nsAutoString path;
 | 
						|
    ErrorResult error;
 | 
						|
    aData.GetAsFile()->GetMozFullPathInternal(path, error);
 | 
						|
    if (error.Failed() || path.IsEmpty()) {
 | 
						|
      error.SuppressException();
 | 
						|
      return nullptr;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    nsCOMPtr<nsIFile> localFile;
 | 
						|
    nsresult rv = NS_NewLocalFile(path, true, getter_AddRefs(localFile));
 | 
						|
    if (NS_WARN_IF(NS_FAILED(rv))) {
 | 
						|
      return nullptr;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    nsCOMPtr<nsIFile> parentFile;
 | 
						|
    rv = localFile->GetParent(getter_AddRefs(parentFile));
 | 
						|
    if (NS_WARN_IF(NS_FAILED(rv))) {
 | 
						|
      return nullptr;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    return parentFile.forget();
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  MOZ_ASSERT(aData.IsDirectory());
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  nsCOMPtr<nsIFile> localFile = aData.GetAsDirectory()->GetInternalNsIFile();
 | 
						|
  MOZ_ASSERT(localFile);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return localFile.forget();
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void GetDOMFileOrDirectoryName(const OwningFileOrDirectory& aData,
 | 
						|
                               nsAString& aName) {
 | 
						|
  if (aData.IsFile()) {
 | 
						|
    aData.GetAsFile()->GetName(aName);
 | 
						|
  } else {
 | 
						|
    MOZ_ASSERT(aData.IsDirectory());
 | 
						|
    ErrorResult rv;
 | 
						|
    aData.GetAsDirectory()->GetName(aName, rv);
 | 
						|
    if (NS_WARN_IF(rv.Failed())) {
 | 
						|
      rv.SuppressException();
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void GetDOMFileOrDirectoryPath(const OwningFileOrDirectory& aData,
 | 
						|
                               nsAString& aPath, ErrorResult& aRv) {
 | 
						|
  if (aData.IsFile()) {
 | 
						|
    aData.GetAsFile()->GetMozFullPathInternal(aPath, aRv);
 | 
						|
  } else {
 | 
						|
    MOZ_ASSERT(aData.IsDirectory());
 | 
						|
    aData.GetAsDirectory()->GetFullRealPath(aPath);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
}  // namespace
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
NS_IMETHODIMP
 | 
						|
HTMLInputElement::nsFilePickerShownCallback::Done(
 | 
						|
    nsIFilePicker::ResultCode aResult) {
 | 
						|
  mInput->PickerClosed();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (aResult == nsIFilePicker::returnCancel) {
 | 
						|
    RefPtr<HTMLInputElement> inputElement(mInput);
 | 
						|
    return nsContentUtils::DispatchTrustedEvent(
 | 
						|
        inputElement->OwnerDoc(), inputElement, u"cancel"_ns, CanBubble::eYes,
 | 
						|
        Cancelable::eNo);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  mInput->OwnerDoc()->NotifyUserGestureActivation();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  nsIFilePicker::Mode mode;
 | 
						|
  mFilePicker->GetMode(&mode);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Collect new selected filenames
 | 
						|
  nsTArray<OwningFileOrDirectory> newFilesOrDirectories;
 | 
						|
  if (mode == nsIFilePicker::modeOpenMultiple) {
 | 
						|
    nsCOMPtr<nsISimpleEnumerator> iter;
 | 
						|
    nsresult rv =
 | 
						|
        mFilePicker->GetDomFileOrDirectoryEnumerator(getter_AddRefs(iter));
 | 
						|
    NS_ENSURE_SUCCESS(rv, rv);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    if (!iter) {
 | 
						|
      return NS_OK;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    nsCOMPtr<nsISupports> tmp;
 | 
						|
    bool hasMore = true;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    while (NS_SUCCEEDED(iter->HasMoreElements(&hasMore)) && hasMore) {
 | 
						|
      iter->GetNext(getter_AddRefs(tmp));
 | 
						|
      RefPtr<Blob> domBlob = do_QueryObject(tmp);
 | 
						|
      MOZ_ASSERT(domBlob,
 | 
						|
                 "Null file object from FilePicker's file enumerator?");
 | 
						|
      if (!domBlob) {
 | 
						|
        continue;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      OwningFileOrDirectory* element = newFilesOrDirectories.AppendElement();
 | 
						|
      element->SetAsFile() = domBlob->ToFile();
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  } else {
 | 
						|
    MOZ_ASSERT(mode == nsIFilePicker::modeOpen ||
 | 
						|
               mode == nsIFilePicker::modeGetFolder);
 | 
						|
    nsCOMPtr<nsISupports> tmp;
 | 
						|
    nsresult rv = mFilePicker->GetDomFileOrDirectory(getter_AddRefs(tmp));
 | 
						|
    NS_ENSURE_SUCCESS(rv, rv);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    if (!tmp) {
 | 
						|
      return NS_OK;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Show a prompt to get user confirmation before allowing folder access.
 | 
						|
    // This is to prevent sites from tricking the user into uploading files.
 | 
						|
    // See Bug 1338637.
 | 
						|
    if (mode == nsIFilePicker::modeGetFolder) {
 | 
						|
      nsCOMPtr<nsIPromptCollection> prompter =
 | 
						|
          do_GetService("@mozilla.org/embedcomp/prompt-collection;1");
 | 
						|
      if (!prompter) {
 | 
						|
        return NS_ERROR_NOT_AVAILABLE;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      bool confirmed = false;
 | 
						|
      BrowsingContext* bc = mInput->OwnerDoc()->GetBrowsingContext();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      // Get directory name
 | 
						|
      RefPtr<Directory> directory = static_cast<Directory*>(tmp.get());
 | 
						|
      nsAutoString directoryName;
 | 
						|
      ErrorResult error;
 | 
						|
      directory->GetName(directoryName, error);
 | 
						|
      if (NS_WARN_IF(error.Failed())) {
 | 
						|
        return error.StealNSResult();
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      rv = prompter->ConfirmFolderUpload(bc, directoryName, &confirmed);
 | 
						|
      NS_ENSURE_SUCCESS(rv, rv);
 | 
						|
      if (!confirmed) {
 | 
						|
        // User aborted upload
 | 
						|
        return NS_OK;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    RefPtr<Blob> blob = do_QueryObject(tmp);
 | 
						|
    if (blob) {
 | 
						|
      RefPtr<File> file = blob->ToFile();
 | 
						|
      MOZ_ASSERT(file);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      OwningFileOrDirectory* element = newFilesOrDirectories.AppendElement();
 | 
						|
      element->SetAsFile() = file;
 | 
						|
    } else if (tmp) {
 | 
						|
      RefPtr<Directory> directory = static_cast<Directory*>(tmp.get());
 | 
						|
      OwningFileOrDirectory* element = newFilesOrDirectories.AppendElement();
 | 
						|
      element->SetAsDirectory() = directory;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (newFilesOrDirectories.IsEmpty()) {
 | 
						|
    return NS_OK;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Store the last used directory using the content pref service:
 | 
						|
  nsCOMPtr<nsIFile> lastUsedDir = LastUsedDirectory(newFilesOrDirectories[0]);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (lastUsedDir) {
 | 
						|
    HTMLInputElement::gUploadLastDir->StoreLastUsedDirectory(mInput->OwnerDoc(),
 | 
						|
                                                             lastUsedDir);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // The text control frame (if there is one) isn't going to send a change
 | 
						|
  // event because it will think this is done by a script.
 | 
						|
  // So, we can safely send one by ourself.
 | 
						|
  mInput->SetFilesOrDirectories(newFilesOrDirectories, true);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // mInput(HTMLInputElement) has no scriptGlobalObject, don't create
 | 
						|
  // DispatchChangeEventCallback
 | 
						|
  if (!mInput->GetOwnerGlobal()) {
 | 
						|
    return NS_OK;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  RefPtr<DispatchChangeEventCallback> dispatchChangeEventCallback =
 | 
						|
      new DispatchChangeEventCallback(mInput);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (StaticPrefs::dom_webkitBlink_dirPicker_enabled() &&
 | 
						|
      mInput->HasAttr(nsGkAtoms::webkitdirectory)) {
 | 
						|
    ErrorResult error;
 | 
						|
    GetFilesHelper* helper = mInput->GetOrCreateGetFilesHelper(true, error);
 | 
						|
    if (NS_WARN_IF(error.Failed())) {
 | 
						|
      return error.StealNSResult();
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    helper->AddCallback(dispatchChangeEventCallback);
 | 
						|
    return NS_OK;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return dispatchChangeEventCallback->DispatchEvents();
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
NS_IMPL_ISUPPORTS(HTMLInputElement::nsFilePickerShownCallback,
 | 
						|
                  nsIFilePickerShownCallback)
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
class nsColorPickerShownCallback final : public nsIColorPickerShownCallback {
 | 
						|
  ~nsColorPickerShownCallback() = default;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
 public:
 | 
						|
  nsColorPickerShownCallback(HTMLInputElement* aInput,
 | 
						|
                             nsIColorPicker* aColorPicker)
 | 
						|
      : mInput(aInput), mColorPicker(aColorPicker), mValueChanged(false) {}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  NS_DECL_ISUPPORTS
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  MOZ_CAN_RUN_SCRIPT_BOUNDARY
 | 
						|
  NS_IMETHOD Update(const nsAString& aColor) override;
 | 
						|
  MOZ_CAN_RUN_SCRIPT_BOUNDARY
 | 
						|
  NS_IMETHOD Done(const nsAString& aColor) override;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
 private:
 | 
						|
  /**
 | 
						|
   * Updates the internals of the object using aColor as the new value.
 | 
						|
   * If aTrustedUpdate is true, it will consider that aColor is a new value.
 | 
						|
   * Otherwise, it will check that aColor is different from the current value.
 | 
						|
   */
 | 
						|
  MOZ_CAN_RUN_SCRIPT
 | 
						|
  nsresult UpdateInternal(const nsAString& aColor, bool aTrustedUpdate);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  RefPtr<HTMLInputElement> mInput;
 | 
						|
  nsCOMPtr<nsIColorPicker> mColorPicker;
 | 
						|
  bool mValueChanged;
 | 
						|
};
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
nsresult nsColorPickerShownCallback::UpdateInternal(const nsAString& aColor,
 | 
						|
                                                    bool aTrustedUpdate) {
 | 
						|
  bool valueChanged = false;
 | 
						|
  nsAutoString oldValue;
 | 
						|
  if (aTrustedUpdate) {
 | 
						|
    mInput->OwnerDoc()->NotifyUserGestureActivation();
 | 
						|
    valueChanged = true;
 | 
						|
  } else {
 | 
						|
    mInput->GetValue(oldValue, CallerType::System);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  mInput->SetValue(aColor, CallerType::System, IgnoreErrors());
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (!aTrustedUpdate) {
 | 
						|
    nsAutoString newValue;
 | 
						|
    mInput->GetValue(newValue, CallerType::System);
 | 
						|
    if (!oldValue.Equals(newValue)) {
 | 
						|
      valueChanged = true;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (!valueChanged) {
 | 
						|
    return NS_OK;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  mValueChanged = true;
 | 
						|
  RefPtr<HTMLInputElement> input(mInput);
 | 
						|
  DebugOnly<nsresult> rvIgnored = nsContentUtils::DispatchInputEvent(input);
 | 
						|
  NS_WARNING_ASSERTION(NS_SUCCEEDED(rvIgnored),
 | 
						|
                       "Failed to dispatch input event");
 | 
						|
  return NS_OK;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
NS_IMETHODIMP
 | 
						|
nsColorPickerShownCallback::Update(const nsAString& aColor) {
 | 
						|
  return UpdateInternal(aColor, true);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
NS_IMETHODIMP
 | 
						|
nsColorPickerShownCallback::Done(const nsAString& aColor) {
 | 
						|
  /**
 | 
						|
   * When Done() is called, we might be at the end of a serie of Update() calls
 | 
						|
   * in which case mValueChanged is set to true and a change event will have to
 | 
						|
   * be fired but we might also be in a one shot Done() call situation in which
 | 
						|
   * case we should fire a change event iif the value actually changed.
 | 
						|
   * UpdateInternal(bool) is taking care of that logic for us.
 | 
						|
   */
 | 
						|
  nsresult rv = NS_OK;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  mInput->PickerClosed();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (!aColor.IsEmpty()) {
 | 
						|
    UpdateInternal(aColor, false);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (mValueChanged) {
 | 
						|
    mInput->SetUserInteracted(true);
 | 
						|
    rv = nsContentUtils::DispatchTrustedEvent(
 | 
						|
        mInput->OwnerDoc(), static_cast<Element*>(mInput.get()), u"change"_ns,
 | 
						|
        CanBubble::eYes, Cancelable::eNo);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return rv;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
NS_IMPL_ISUPPORTS(nsColorPickerShownCallback, nsIColorPickerShownCallback)
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
static bool IsPickerBlocked(Document* aDoc) {
 | 
						|
  if (aDoc->ConsumeTransientUserGestureActivation()) {
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  nsContentUtils::ReportToConsole(nsIScriptError::warningFlag, "DOM"_ns, aDoc,
 | 
						|
                                  nsContentUtils::eDOM_PROPERTIES,
 | 
						|
                                  "InputPickerBlockedNoUserActivation");
 | 
						|
  return true;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
nsTArray<nsString> HTMLInputElement::GetColorsFromList() {
 | 
						|
  RefPtr<HTMLDataListElement> dataList = GetList();
 | 
						|
  if (!dataList) {
 | 
						|
    return {};
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  nsTArray<nsString> colors;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  RefPtr<nsContentList> options = dataList->Options();
 | 
						|
  uint32_t length = options->Length(true);
 | 
						|
  for (uint32_t i = 0; i < length; ++i) {
 | 
						|
    auto* option = HTMLOptionElement::FromNodeOrNull(options->Item(i, false));
 | 
						|
    if (!option) {
 | 
						|
      continue;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    nsString value;
 | 
						|
    option->GetValue(value);
 | 
						|
    if (IsValidSimpleColor(value)) {
 | 
						|
      ToLowerCase(value);
 | 
						|
      colors.AppendElement(value);
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return colors;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
nsresult HTMLInputElement::InitColorPicker() {
 | 
						|
  MOZ_ASSERT(IsMutable());
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (mPickerRunning) {
 | 
						|
    NS_WARNING("Just one nsIColorPicker is allowed");
 | 
						|
    return NS_ERROR_FAILURE;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  nsCOMPtr<Document> doc = OwnerDoc();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  nsCOMPtr<nsPIDOMWindowOuter> win = doc->GetWindow();
 | 
						|
  if (!win) {
 | 
						|
    return NS_ERROR_FAILURE;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (IsPickerBlocked(doc)) {
 | 
						|
    return NS_OK;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Get Loc title
 | 
						|
  nsAutoString title;
 | 
						|
  nsContentUtils::GetLocalizedString(nsContentUtils::eFORMS_PROPERTIES,
 | 
						|
                                     "ColorPicker", title);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  nsCOMPtr<nsIColorPicker> colorPicker =
 | 
						|
      do_CreateInstance("@mozilla.org/colorpicker;1");
 | 
						|
  if (!colorPicker) {
 | 
						|
    return NS_ERROR_FAILURE;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  nsAutoString initialValue;
 | 
						|
  GetNonFileValueInternal(initialValue);
 | 
						|
  nsTArray<nsString> colors = GetColorsFromList();
 | 
						|
  nsresult rv = colorPicker->Init(win, title, initialValue, colors);
 | 
						|
  NS_ENSURE_SUCCESS(rv, rv);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  nsCOMPtr<nsIColorPickerShownCallback> callback =
 | 
						|
      new nsColorPickerShownCallback(this, colorPicker);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  rv = colorPicker->Open(callback);
 | 
						|
  if (NS_SUCCEEDED(rv)) {
 | 
						|
    mPickerRunning = true;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return rv;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
nsresult HTMLInputElement::InitFilePicker(FilePickerType aType) {
 | 
						|
  MOZ_ASSERT(IsMutable());
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (mPickerRunning) {
 | 
						|
    NS_WARNING("Just one nsIFilePicker is allowed");
 | 
						|
    return NS_ERROR_FAILURE;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Get parent nsPIDOMWindow object.
 | 
						|
  nsCOMPtr<Document> doc = OwnerDoc();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  RefPtr<BrowsingContext> bc = doc->GetBrowsingContext();
 | 
						|
  if (!bc) {
 | 
						|
    return NS_ERROR_FAILURE;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (IsPickerBlocked(doc)) {
 | 
						|
    return NS_OK;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Get Loc title
 | 
						|
  nsAutoString title;
 | 
						|
  nsAutoString okButtonLabel;
 | 
						|
  if (aType == FILE_PICKER_DIRECTORY) {
 | 
						|
    nsContentUtils::GetMaybeLocalizedString(nsContentUtils::eFORMS_PROPERTIES,
 | 
						|
                                            "DirectoryUpload", doc, title);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    nsContentUtils::GetMaybeLocalizedString(nsContentUtils::eFORMS_PROPERTIES,
 | 
						|
                                            "DirectoryPickerOkButtonLabel", doc,
 | 
						|
                                            okButtonLabel);
 | 
						|
  } else {
 | 
						|
    nsContentUtils::GetMaybeLocalizedString(nsContentUtils::eFORMS_PROPERTIES,
 | 
						|
                                            "FileUpload", doc, title);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  nsCOMPtr<nsIFilePicker> filePicker =
 | 
						|
      do_CreateInstance("@mozilla.org/filepicker;1");
 | 
						|
  if (!filePicker) return NS_ERROR_FAILURE;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  nsIFilePicker::Mode mode;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (aType == FILE_PICKER_DIRECTORY) {
 | 
						|
    mode = nsIFilePicker::modeGetFolder;
 | 
						|
  } else if (HasAttr(nsGkAtoms::multiple)) {
 | 
						|
    mode = nsIFilePicker::modeOpenMultiple;
 | 
						|
  } else {
 | 
						|
    mode = nsIFilePicker::modeOpen;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  nsresult rv = filePicker->Init(bc, title, mode);
 | 
						|
  NS_ENSURE_SUCCESS(rv, rv);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (!okButtonLabel.IsEmpty()) {
 | 
						|
    filePicker->SetOkButtonLabel(okButtonLabel);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Native directory pickers ignore file type filters, so we don't spend
 | 
						|
  // cycles adding them for FILE_PICKER_DIRECTORY.
 | 
						|
  if (HasAttr(nsGkAtoms::accept) && aType != FILE_PICKER_DIRECTORY) {
 | 
						|
    SetFilePickerFiltersFromAccept(filePicker);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    if (StaticPrefs::dom_capture_enabled()) {
 | 
						|
      if (const nsAttrValue* captureVal = GetParsedAttr(nsGkAtoms::capture)) {
 | 
						|
        filePicker->SetCapture(static_cast<nsIFilePicker::CaptureTarget>(
 | 
						|
            captureVal->GetEnumValue()));
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  } else {
 | 
						|
    filePicker->AppendFilters(nsIFilePicker::filterAll);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Set default directory and filename
 | 
						|
  nsAutoString defaultName;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  const nsTArray<OwningFileOrDirectory>& oldFiles =
 | 
						|
      GetFilesOrDirectoriesInternal();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  nsCOMPtr<nsIFilePickerShownCallback> callback =
 | 
						|
      new HTMLInputElement::nsFilePickerShownCallback(this, filePicker);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (!oldFiles.IsEmpty() && aType != FILE_PICKER_DIRECTORY) {
 | 
						|
    nsAutoString path;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    nsCOMPtr<nsIFile> parentFile = LastUsedDirectory(oldFiles[0]);
 | 
						|
    if (parentFile) {
 | 
						|
      filePicker->SetDisplayDirectory(parentFile);
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Unfortunately nsIFilePicker doesn't allow multiple files to be
 | 
						|
    // default-selected, so only select something by default if exactly
 | 
						|
    // one file was selected before.
 | 
						|
    if (oldFiles.Length() == 1) {
 | 
						|
      nsAutoString leafName;
 | 
						|
      GetDOMFileOrDirectoryName(oldFiles[0], leafName);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      if (!leafName.IsEmpty()) {
 | 
						|
        filePicker->SetDefaultString(leafName);
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    rv = filePicker->Open(callback);
 | 
						|
    if (NS_SUCCEEDED(rv)) {
 | 
						|
      mPickerRunning = true;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    return rv;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  HTMLInputElement::gUploadLastDir->FetchDirectoryAndDisplayPicker(
 | 
						|
      doc, filePicker, callback);
 | 
						|
  mPickerRunning = true;
 | 
						|
  return NS_OK;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
#define CPS_PREF_NAME u"browser.upload.lastDir"_ns
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
NS_IMPL_ISUPPORTS(UploadLastDir, nsIObserver, nsISupportsWeakReference)
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::InitUploadLastDir() {
 | 
						|
  gUploadLastDir = new UploadLastDir();
 | 
						|
  NS_ADDREF(gUploadLastDir);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  nsCOMPtr<nsIObserverService> observerService = services::GetObserverService();
 | 
						|
  if (observerService && gUploadLastDir) {
 | 
						|
    observerService->AddObserver(gUploadLastDir,
 | 
						|
                                 "browser:purge-session-history", true);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::DestroyUploadLastDir() { NS_IF_RELEASE(gUploadLastDir); }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
nsresult UploadLastDir::FetchDirectoryAndDisplayPicker(
 | 
						|
    Document* aDoc, nsIFilePicker* aFilePicker,
 | 
						|
    nsIFilePickerShownCallback* aFpCallback) {
 | 
						|
  MOZ_ASSERT(aDoc, "aDoc is null");
 | 
						|
  MOZ_ASSERT(aFilePicker, "aFilePicker is null");
 | 
						|
  MOZ_ASSERT(aFpCallback, "aFpCallback is null");
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  nsIURI* docURI = aDoc->GetDocumentURI();
 | 
						|
  MOZ_ASSERT(docURI, "docURI is null");
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  nsCOMPtr<nsILoadContext> loadContext = aDoc->GetLoadContext();
 | 
						|
  nsCOMPtr<nsIContentPrefCallback2> prefCallback =
 | 
						|
      new UploadLastDir::ContentPrefCallback(aFilePicker, aFpCallback);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Attempt to get the CPS, if it's not present we'll fallback to use the
 | 
						|
  // Desktop folder
 | 
						|
  nsCOMPtr<nsIContentPrefService2> contentPrefService =
 | 
						|
      do_GetService(NS_CONTENT_PREF_SERVICE_CONTRACTID);
 | 
						|
  if (!contentPrefService) {
 | 
						|
    prefCallback->HandleCompletion(nsIContentPrefCallback2::COMPLETE_ERROR);
 | 
						|
    return NS_OK;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  nsAutoCString cstrSpec;
 | 
						|
  docURI->GetSpec(cstrSpec);
 | 
						|
  NS_ConvertUTF8toUTF16 spec(cstrSpec);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  contentPrefService->GetByDomainAndName(spec, CPS_PREF_NAME, loadContext,
 | 
						|
                                         prefCallback);
 | 
						|
  return NS_OK;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
nsresult UploadLastDir::StoreLastUsedDirectory(Document* aDoc, nsIFile* aDir) {
 | 
						|
  MOZ_ASSERT(aDoc, "aDoc is null");
 | 
						|
  if (!aDir) {
 | 
						|
    return NS_OK;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  nsCOMPtr<nsIURI> docURI = aDoc->GetDocumentURI();
 | 
						|
  MOZ_ASSERT(docURI, "docURI is null");
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Attempt to get the CPS, if it's not present we'll just return
 | 
						|
  nsCOMPtr<nsIContentPrefService2> contentPrefService =
 | 
						|
      do_GetService(NS_CONTENT_PREF_SERVICE_CONTRACTID);
 | 
						|
  if (!contentPrefService) return NS_ERROR_NOT_AVAILABLE;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  nsAutoCString cstrSpec;
 | 
						|
  docURI->GetSpec(cstrSpec);
 | 
						|
  NS_ConvertUTF8toUTF16 spec(cstrSpec);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Find the parent of aFile, and store it
 | 
						|
  nsString unicodePath;
 | 
						|
  aDir->GetPath(unicodePath);
 | 
						|
  if (unicodePath.IsEmpty())  // nothing to do
 | 
						|
    return NS_OK;
 | 
						|
  RefPtr<nsVariantCC> prefValue = new nsVariantCC();
 | 
						|
  prefValue->SetAsAString(unicodePath);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Use the document's current load context to ensure that the content pref
 | 
						|
  // service doesn't persistently store this directory for this domain if the
 | 
						|
  // user is using private browsing:
 | 
						|
  nsCOMPtr<nsILoadContext> loadContext = aDoc->GetLoadContext();
 | 
						|
  return contentPrefService->Set(spec, CPS_PREF_NAME, prefValue, loadContext,
 | 
						|
                                 nullptr);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
NS_IMETHODIMP
 | 
						|
UploadLastDir::Observe(nsISupports* aSubject, char const* aTopic,
 | 
						|
                       char16_t const* aData) {
 | 
						|
  if (strcmp(aTopic, "browser:purge-session-history") == 0) {
 | 
						|
    nsCOMPtr<nsIContentPrefService2> contentPrefService =
 | 
						|
        do_GetService(NS_CONTENT_PREF_SERVICE_CONTRACTID);
 | 
						|
    if (contentPrefService)
 | 
						|
      contentPrefService->RemoveByName(CPS_PREF_NAME, nullptr, nullptr);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return NS_OK;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
#ifdef ACCESSIBILITY
 | 
						|
// Helper method
 | 
						|
static nsresult FireEventForAccessibility(HTMLInputElement* aTarget,
 | 
						|
                                          EventMessage aEventMessage);
 | 
						|
#endif
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
//
 | 
						|
// construction, destruction
 | 
						|
//
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
HTMLInputElement::HTMLInputElement(already_AddRefed<dom::NodeInfo>&& aNodeInfo,
 | 
						|
                                   FromParser aFromParser, FromClone aFromClone)
 | 
						|
    : TextControlElement(std::move(aNodeInfo), aFromParser,
 | 
						|
                         FormControlType(kInputDefaultType->value)),
 | 
						|
      mAutocompleteAttrState(nsContentUtils::eAutocompleteAttrState_Unknown),
 | 
						|
      mAutocompleteInfoState(nsContentUtils::eAutocompleteAttrState_Unknown),
 | 
						|
      mDisabledChanged(false),
 | 
						|
      mValueChanged(false),
 | 
						|
      mUserInteracted(false),
 | 
						|
      mLastValueChangeWasInteractive(false),
 | 
						|
      mCheckedChanged(false),
 | 
						|
      mChecked(false),
 | 
						|
      mShouldInitChecked(false),
 | 
						|
      mDoneCreating(aFromParser == NOT_FROM_PARSER &&
 | 
						|
                    aFromClone == FromClone::No),
 | 
						|
      mInInternalActivate(false),
 | 
						|
      mCheckedIsToggled(false),
 | 
						|
      mIndeterminate(false),
 | 
						|
      mInhibitRestoration(aFromParser & FROM_PARSER_FRAGMENT),
 | 
						|
      mHasRange(false),
 | 
						|
      mIsDraggingRange(false),
 | 
						|
      mNumberControlSpinnerIsSpinning(false),
 | 
						|
      mNumberControlSpinnerSpinsUp(false),
 | 
						|
      mPickerRunning(false),
 | 
						|
      mIsPreviewEnabled(false),
 | 
						|
      mHasBeenTypePassword(false),
 | 
						|
      mHasPatternAttribute(false),
 | 
						|
      mRadioGroupContainer(nullptr) {
 | 
						|
  // If size is above 512, mozjemalloc allocates 1kB, see
 | 
						|
  // memory/build/mozjemalloc.cpp
 | 
						|
  static_assert(sizeof(HTMLInputElement) <= 512,
 | 
						|
                "Keep the size of HTMLInputElement under 512 to avoid "
 | 
						|
                "performance regression!");
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // We are in a type=text but we create TextControlState lazily.
 | 
						|
  mInputData.mState = nullptr;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  void* memory = mInputTypeMem;
 | 
						|
  mInputType = InputType::Create(this, mType, memory);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (!gUploadLastDir) HTMLInputElement::InitUploadLastDir();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Set up our default state.  By default we're enabled (since we're a control
 | 
						|
  // type that can be disabled but not actually disabled right now), optional,
 | 
						|
  // read-write, and valid. Also by default we don't have to show validity UI
 | 
						|
  // and so forth.
 | 
						|
  AddStatesSilently(ElementState::ENABLED | ElementState::OPTIONAL_ |
 | 
						|
                    ElementState::VALID | ElementState::VALUE_EMPTY |
 | 
						|
                    ElementState::READWRITE);
 | 
						|
  RemoveStatesSilently(ElementState::READONLY);
 | 
						|
  UpdateApzAwareFlag();
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
HTMLInputElement::~HTMLInputElement() {
 | 
						|
  if (mNumberControlSpinnerIsSpinning) {
 | 
						|
    StopNumberControlSpinnerSpin(eDisallowDispatchingEvents);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  nsImageLoadingContent::Destroy();
 | 
						|
  FreeData();
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::FreeData() {
 | 
						|
  if (!IsSingleLineTextControl(false)) {
 | 
						|
    free(mInputData.mValue);
 | 
						|
    mInputData.mValue = nullptr;
 | 
						|
  } else if (mInputData.mState) {
 | 
						|
    // XXX Passing nullptr to UnbindFromFrame doesn't do anything!
 | 
						|
    UnbindFromFrame(nullptr);
 | 
						|
    mInputData.mState->Destroy();
 | 
						|
    mInputData.mState = nullptr;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (mInputType) {
 | 
						|
    mInputType->DropReference();
 | 
						|
    mInputType = nullptr;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::EnsureEditorState() {
 | 
						|
  MOZ_ASSERT(IsSingleLineTextControl(false));
 | 
						|
  if (!mInputData.mState) {
 | 
						|
    mInputData.mState = TextControlState::Construct(this);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
TextControlState* HTMLInputElement::GetEditorState() const {
 | 
						|
  if (!IsSingleLineTextControl(false)) {
 | 
						|
    return nullptr;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // We've postponed allocating TextControlState, doing that in a const
 | 
						|
  // method is fine.
 | 
						|
  const_cast<HTMLInputElement*>(this)->EnsureEditorState();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  MOZ_ASSERT(mInputData.mState,
 | 
						|
             "Single line text controls need to have a state"
 | 
						|
             " associated with them");
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return mInputData.mState;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
// nsISupports
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
NS_IMPL_CYCLE_COLLECTION_CLASS(HTMLInputElement)
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
NS_IMPL_CYCLE_COLLECTION_TRAVERSE_BEGIN_INHERITED(HTMLInputElement,
 | 
						|
                                                  TextControlElement)
 | 
						|
  NS_IMPL_CYCLE_COLLECTION_TRAVERSE(mValidity)
 | 
						|
  NS_IMPL_CYCLE_COLLECTION_TRAVERSE(mControllers)
 | 
						|
  if (tmp->IsSingleLineTextControl(false) && tmp->mInputData.mState) {
 | 
						|
    tmp->mInputData.mState->Traverse(cb);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (tmp->mFileData) {
 | 
						|
    tmp->mFileData->Traverse(cb);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
NS_IMPL_CYCLE_COLLECTION_TRAVERSE_END
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
NS_IMPL_CYCLE_COLLECTION_UNLINK_BEGIN_INHERITED(HTMLInputElement,
 | 
						|
                                                TextControlElement)
 | 
						|
  NS_IMPL_CYCLE_COLLECTION_UNLINK(mValidity)
 | 
						|
  NS_IMPL_CYCLE_COLLECTION_UNLINK(mControllers)
 | 
						|
  if (tmp->IsSingleLineTextControl(false) && tmp->mInputData.mState) {
 | 
						|
    tmp->mInputData.mState->Unlink();
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (tmp->mFileData) {
 | 
						|
    tmp->mFileData->Unlink();
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  // XXX should unlink more?
 | 
						|
NS_IMPL_CYCLE_COLLECTION_UNLINK_END
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
NS_IMPL_ISUPPORTS_CYCLE_COLLECTION_INHERITED(HTMLInputElement,
 | 
						|
                                             TextControlElement,
 | 
						|
                                             imgINotificationObserver,
 | 
						|
                                             nsIImageLoadingContent,
 | 
						|
                                             nsIConstraintValidation)
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
// nsINode
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
nsresult HTMLInputElement::Clone(dom::NodeInfo* aNodeInfo,
 | 
						|
                                 nsINode** aResult) const {
 | 
						|
  *aResult = nullptr;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  RefPtr<HTMLInputElement> it = new (aNodeInfo->NodeInfoManager())
 | 
						|
      HTMLInputElement(do_AddRef(aNodeInfo), NOT_FROM_PARSER, FromClone::Yes);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  nsresult rv = const_cast<HTMLInputElement*>(this)->CopyInnerTo(it);
 | 
						|
  NS_ENSURE_SUCCESS(rv, rv);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  switch (GetValueMode()) {
 | 
						|
    case VALUE_MODE_VALUE:
 | 
						|
      if (mValueChanged) {
 | 
						|
        // We don't have our default value anymore.  Set our value on
 | 
						|
        // the clone.
 | 
						|
        nsAutoString value;
 | 
						|
        GetNonFileValueInternal(value);
 | 
						|
        // SetValueInternal handles setting the VALUE_CHANGED bit for us
 | 
						|
        if (NS_WARN_IF(
 | 
						|
                NS_FAILED(rv = it->SetValueInternal(
 | 
						|
                              value, {ValueSetterOption::SetValueChanged})))) {
 | 
						|
          return rv;
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      break;
 | 
						|
    case VALUE_MODE_FILENAME:
 | 
						|
      if (it->OwnerDoc()->IsStaticDocument()) {
 | 
						|
        // We're going to be used in print preview.  Since the doc is static
 | 
						|
        // we can just grab the pretty string and use it as wallpaper
 | 
						|
        GetDisplayFileName(it->mFileData->mStaticDocFileList);
 | 
						|
      } else {
 | 
						|
        it->mFileData->ClearGetFilesHelpers();
 | 
						|
        it->mFileData->mFilesOrDirectories.Clear();
 | 
						|
        it->mFileData->mFilesOrDirectories.AppendElements(
 | 
						|
            mFileData->mFilesOrDirectories);
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      break;
 | 
						|
    case VALUE_MODE_DEFAULT_ON:
 | 
						|
    case VALUE_MODE_DEFAULT:
 | 
						|
      break;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (mCheckedChanged) {
 | 
						|
    // We no longer have our original checked state.  Set our
 | 
						|
    // checked state on the clone.
 | 
						|
    it->DoSetChecked(mChecked, false, true);
 | 
						|
    // Then tell DoneCreatingElement() not to overwrite:
 | 
						|
    it->mShouldInitChecked = false;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  it->mIndeterminate = mIndeterminate;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  it->DoneCreatingElement();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  it->SetLastValueChangeWasInteractive(mLastValueChangeWasInteractive);
 | 
						|
  it.forget(aResult);
 | 
						|
  return NS_OK;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::BeforeSetAttr(int32_t aNameSpaceID, nsAtom* aName,
 | 
						|
                                     const nsAttrValue* aValue, bool aNotify) {
 | 
						|
  if (aNameSpaceID == kNameSpaceID_None) {
 | 
						|
    if (aNotify && aName == nsGkAtoms::disabled) {
 | 
						|
      mDisabledChanged = true;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // When name or type changes, radio should be removed from radio group.
 | 
						|
    // If we are not done creating the radio, we also should not do it.
 | 
						|
    if (mType == FormControlType::InputRadio) {
 | 
						|
      if ((aName == nsGkAtoms::name || (aName == nsGkAtoms::type && !mForm)) &&
 | 
						|
          (mForm || mDoneCreating)) {
 | 
						|
        RemoveFromRadioGroup();
 | 
						|
      } else if (aName == nsGkAtoms::required) {
 | 
						|
        auto* container = GetCurrentRadioGroupContainer();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        if (container && ((aValue && !HasAttr(aNameSpaceID, aName)) ||
 | 
						|
                          (!aValue && HasAttr(aNameSpaceID, aName)))) {
 | 
						|
          nsAutoString name;
 | 
						|
          GetAttr(nsGkAtoms::name, name);
 | 
						|
          container->RadioRequiredWillChange(name, !!aValue);
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    if (aName == nsGkAtoms::webkitdirectory) {
 | 
						|
      Telemetry::Accumulate(Telemetry::WEBKIT_DIRECTORY_USED, true);
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return nsGenericHTMLFormControlElementWithState::BeforeSetAttr(
 | 
						|
      aNameSpaceID, aName, aValue, aNotify);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::AfterSetAttr(int32_t aNameSpaceID, nsAtom* aName,
 | 
						|
                                    const nsAttrValue* aValue,
 | 
						|
                                    const nsAttrValue* aOldValue,
 | 
						|
                                    nsIPrincipal* aSubjectPrincipal,
 | 
						|
                                    bool aNotify) {
 | 
						|
  if (aNameSpaceID == kNameSpaceID_None) {
 | 
						|
    bool needValidityUpdate = false;
 | 
						|
    if (aName == nsGkAtoms::src) {
 | 
						|
      mSrcTriggeringPrincipal = nsContentUtils::GetAttrTriggeringPrincipal(
 | 
						|
          this, aValue ? aValue->GetStringValue() : EmptyString(),
 | 
						|
          aSubjectPrincipal);
 | 
						|
      if (aNotify && mType == FormControlType::InputImage) {
 | 
						|
        if (aValue) {
 | 
						|
          // Mark channel as urgent-start before load image if the image load is
 | 
						|
          // initiated by a user interaction.
 | 
						|
          mUseUrgentStartForChannel = UserActivation::IsHandlingUserInput();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          LoadImage(aValue->GetStringValue(), true, aNotify,
 | 
						|
                    eImageLoadType_Normal, mSrcTriggeringPrincipal);
 | 
						|
        } else {
 | 
						|
          // Null value means the attr got unset; drop the image
 | 
						|
          CancelImageRequests(aNotify);
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    if (aName == nsGkAtoms::value) {
 | 
						|
      // If the element has a value in value mode, the value content attribute
 | 
						|
      // is the default value. So if the elements value didn't change from the
 | 
						|
      // default, we have to re-set it.
 | 
						|
      if (!mValueChanged && GetValueMode() == VALUE_MODE_VALUE) {
 | 
						|
        SetDefaultValueAsValue();
 | 
						|
      } else if (GetValueMode() == VALUE_MODE_DEFAULT && HasDirAuto()) {
 | 
						|
        SetAutoDirectionality(aNotify);
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      // GetStepBase() depends on the `value` attribute if `min` is not present,
 | 
						|
      // even if the value doesn't change.
 | 
						|
      UpdateStepMismatchValidityState();
 | 
						|
      needValidityUpdate = true;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Checked must be set no matter what type of control it is, since
 | 
						|
    // mChecked must reflect the new value
 | 
						|
    if (aName == nsGkAtoms::checked) {
 | 
						|
      if (IsRadioOrCheckbox()) {
 | 
						|
        SetStates(ElementState::DEFAULT, !!aValue, aNotify);
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      if (!mCheckedChanged) {
 | 
						|
        // Delay setting checked if we are creating this element (wait
 | 
						|
        // until everything is set)
 | 
						|
        if (!mDoneCreating) {
 | 
						|
          mShouldInitChecked = true;
 | 
						|
        } else {
 | 
						|
          DoSetChecked(!!aValue, aNotify, false);
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      needValidityUpdate = true;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    if (aName == nsGkAtoms::type) {
 | 
						|
      FormControlType newType;
 | 
						|
      if (!aValue) {
 | 
						|
        // We're now a text input.
 | 
						|
        newType = FormControlType(kInputDefaultType->value);
 | 
						|
      } else {
 | 
						|
        newType = FormControlType(aValue->GetEnumValue());
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      if (newType != mType) {
 | 
						|
        HandleTypeChange(newType, aNotify);
 | 
						|
        needValidityUpdate = true;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // When name or type changes, radio should be added to radio group.
 | 
						|
    // If we are not done creating the radio, we also should not do it.
 | 
						|
    if ((aName == nsGkAtoms::name || (aName == nsGkAtoms::type && !mForm)) &&
 | 
						|
        mType == FormControlType::InputRadio && (mForm || mDoneCreating)) {
 | 
						|
      AddToRadioGroup();
 | 
						|
      UpdateValueMissingValidityStateForRadio(false);
 | 
						|
      needValidityUpdate = true;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    if (aName == nsGkAtoms::required || aName == nsGkAtoms::disabled ||
 | 
						|
        aName == nsGkAtoms::readonly) {
 | 
						|
      if (aName == nsGkAtoms::disabled) {
 | 
						|
        // This *has* to be called *before* validity state check because
 | 
						|
        // UpdateBarredFromConstraintValidation and
 | 
						|
        // UpdateValueMissingValidityState depend on our disabled state.
 | 
						|
        UpdateDisabledState(aNotify);
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      if (aName == nsGkAtoms::required && DoesRequiredApply()) {
 | 
						|
        // This *has* to be called *before* UpdateValueMissingValidityState
 | 
						|
        // because UpdateValueMissingValidityState depends on our required
 | 
						|
        // state.
 | 
						|
        UpdateRequiredState(!!aValue, aNotify);
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      if (aName == nsGkAtoms::readonly && !!aValue != !!aOldValue) {
 | 
						|
        UpdateReadOnlyState(aNotify);
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      UpdateValueMissingValidityState();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      // This *has* to be called *after* validity has changed.
 | 
						|
      if (aName == nsGkAtoms::readonly || aName == nsGkAtoms::disabled) {
 | 
						|
        UpdateBarredFromConstraintValidation();
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      needValidityUpdate = true;
 | 
						|
    } else if (aName == nsGkAtoms::maxlength) {
 | 
						|
      UpdateTooLongValidityState();
 | 
						|
      needValidityUpdate = true;
 | 
						|
    } else if (aName == nsGkAtoms::minlength) {
 | 
						|
      UpdateTooShortValidityState();
 | 
						|
      needValidityUpdate = true;
 | 
						|
    } else if (aName == nsGkAtoms::pattern) {
 | 
						|
      // Although pattern attribute only applies to single line text controls,
 | 
						|
      // we set this flag for all input types to save having to check the type
 | 
						|
      // here.
 | 
						|
      mHasPatternAttribute = !!aValue;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      if (mDoneCreating) {
 | 
						|
        UpdatePatternMismatchValidityState();
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      needValidityUpdate = true;
 | 
						|
    } else if (aName == nsGkAtoms::multiple) {
 | 
						|
      UpdateTypeMismatchValidityState();
 | 
						|
      needValidityUpdate = true;
 | 
						|
    } else if (aName == nsGkAtoms::max) {
 | 
						|
      UpdateHasRange(aNotify);
 | 
						|
      mInputType->MinMaxStepAttrChanged();
 | 
						|
      // Validity state must be updated *after* the UpdateValueDueToAttrChange
 | 
						|
      // call above or else the following assert will not be valid.
 | 
						|
      // We don't assert the state of underflow during creation since
 | 
						|
      // DoneCreatingElement sanitizes.
 | 
						|
      UpdateRangeOverflowValidityState();
 | 
						|
      needValidityUpdate = true;
 | 
						|
      MOZ_ASSERT(!mDoneCreating || mType != FormControlType::InputRange ||
 | 
						|
                     !GetValidityState(VALIDITY_STATE_RANGE_UNDERFLOW),
 | 
						|
                 "HTML5 spec does not allow underflow for type=range");
 | 
						|
    } else if (aName == nsGkAtoms::min) {
 | 
						|
      UpdateHasRange(aNotify);
 | 
						|
      mInputType->MinMaxStepAttrChanged();
 | 
						|
      // See corresponding @max comment
 | 
						|
      UpdateRangeUnderflowValidityState();
 | 
						|
      UpdateStepMismatchValidityState();
 | 
						|
      needValidityUpdate = true;
 | 
						|
      MOZ_ASSERT(!mDoneCreating || mType != FormControlType::InputRange ||
 | 
						|
                     !GetValidityState(VALIDITY_STATE_RANGE_UNDERFLOW),
 | 
						|
                 "HTML5 spec does not allow underflow for type=range");
 | 
						|
    } else if (aName == nsGkAtoms::step) {
 | 
						|
      mInputType->MinMaxStepAttrChanged();
 | 
						|
      // See corresponding @max comment
 | 
						|
      UpdateStepMismatchValidityState();
 | 
						|
      needValidityUpdate = true;
 | 
						|
      MOZ_ASSERT(!mDoneCreating || mType != FormControlType::InputRange ||
 | 
						|
                     !GetValidityState(VALIDITY_STATE_RANGE_UNDERFLOW),
 | 
						|
                 "HTML5 spec does not allow underflow for type=range");
 | 
						|
    } else if (aName == nsGkAtoms::dir && aValue &&
 | 
						|
               aValue->Equals(nsGkAtoms::_auto, eIgnoreCase)) {
 | 
						|
      SetAutoDirectionality(aNotify);
 | 
						|
    } else if (aName == nsGkAtoms::lang) {
 | 
						|
      // FIXME(emilio, bug 1651070): This doesn't account for lang changes on
 | 
						|
      // ancestors.
 | 
						|
      if (mType == FormControlType::InputNumber) {
 | 
						|
        // The validity of our value may have changed based on the locale.
 | 
						|
        UpdateValidityState();
 | 
						|
        needValidityUpdate = true;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    } else if (aName == nsGkAtoms::autocomplete) {
 | 
						|
      // Clear the cached @autocomplete attribute and autocompleteInfo state.
 | 
						|
      mAutocompleteAttrState = nsContentUtils::eAutocompleteAttrState_Unknown;
 | 
						|
      mAutocompleteInfoState = nsContentUtils::eAutocompleteAttrState_Unknown;
 | 
						|
    } else if (aName == nsGkAtoms::placeholder) {
 | 
						|
      // Full addition / removals of the attribute reconstruct right now.
 | 
						|
      if (nsTextControlFrame* f = do_QueryFrame(GetPrimaryFrame())) {
 | 
						|
        f->PlaceholderChanged(aOldValue, aValue);
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      UpdatePlaceholderShownState();
 | 
						|
      needValidityUpdate = true;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    if (CreatesDateTimeWidget()) {
 | 
						|
      if (aName == nsGkAtoms::value || aName == nsGkAtoms::readonly ||
 | 
						|
          aName == nsGkAtoms::tabindex || aName == nsGkAtoms::required ||
 | 
						|
          aName == nsGkAtoms::disabled) {
 | 
						|
        // If original target is this and not the inner text control, we should
 | 
						|
        // pass the focus to the inner text control.
 | 
						|
        if (Element* dateTimeBoxElement = GetDateTimeBoxElement()) {
 | 
						|
          AsyncEventDispatcher::RunDOMEventWhenSafe(
 | 
						|
              *dateTimeBoxElement,
 | 
						|
              aName == nsGkAtoms::value ? u"MozDateTimeValueChanged"_ns
 | 
						|
                                        : u"MozDateTimeAttributeChanged"_ns,
 | 
						|
              CanBubble::eNo, ChromeOnlyDispatch::eNo);
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    if (needValidityUpdate) {
 | 
						|
      UpdateValidityElementStates(aNotify);
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return nsGenericHTMLFormControlElementWithState::AfterSetAttr(
 | 
						|
      aNameSpaceID, aName, aValue, aOldValue, aSubjectPrincipal, aNotify);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::BeforeSetForm(HTMLFormElement* aForm, bool aBindToTree) {
 | 
						|
  // No need to remove from radio group if we are just binding to tree.
 | 
						|
  if (mType == FormControlType::InputRadio && !aBindToTree) {
 | 
						|
    RemoveFromRadioGroup();
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Dispatch event when <input> @form is set
 | 
						|
  if (!aBindToTree) {
 | 
						|
    MaybeDispatchLoginManagerEvents(aForm);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::AfterClearForm(bool aUnbindOrDelete) {
 | 
						|
  MOZ_ASSERT(!mForm);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Do not add back to radio group if we are releasing or unbinding from tree.
 | 
						|
  if (mType == FormControlType::InputRadio && !aUnbindOrDelete &&
 | 
						|
      !GetCurrentRadioGroupContainer()) {
 | 
						|
    AddToRadioGroup();
 | 
						|
    UpdateValueMissingValidityStateForRadio(false);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::ResultForDialogSubmit(nsAString& aResult) {
 | 
						|
  if (mType == FormControlType::InputImage) {
 | 
						|
    // Get a property set by the frame to find out where it was clicked.
 | 
						|
    const auto* lastClickedPoint =
 | 
						|
        static_cast<CSSIntPoint*>(GetProperty(nsGkAtoms::imageClickedPoint));
 | 
						|
    int32_t x, y;
 | 
						|
    if (lastClickedPoint) {
 | 
						|
      x = lastClickedPoint->x;
 | 
						|
      y = lastClickedPoint->y;
 | 
						|
    } else {
 | 
						|
      x = y = 0;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    aResult.AppendInt(x);
 | 
						|
    aResult.AppendLiteral(",");
 | 
						|
    aResult.AppendInt(y);
 | 
						|
  } else {
 | 
						|
    GetAttr(nsGkAtoms::value, aResult);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::GetAutocomplete(nsAString& aValue) {
 | 
						|
  if (!DoesAutocompleteApply()) {
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  aValue.Truncate();
 | 
						|
  const nsAttrValue* attributeVal = GetParsedAttr(nsGkAtoms::autocomplete);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  mAutocompleteAttrState = nsContentUtils::SerializeAutocompleteAttribute(
 | 
						|
      attributeVal, aValue, mAutocompleteAttrState);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::GetAutocompleteInfo(Nullable<AutocompleteInfo>& aInfo) {
 | 
						|
  if (!DoesAutocompleteApply()) {
 | 
						|
    aInfo.SetNull();
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  const nsAttrValue* attributeVal = GetParsedAttr(nsGkAtoms::autocomplete);
 | 
						|
  mAutocompleteInfoState = nsContentUtils::SerializeAutocompleteAttribute(
 | 
						|
      attributeVal, aInfo.SetValue(), mAutocompleteInfoState, true);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::GetCapture(nsAString& aValue) {
 | 
						|
  GetEnumAttr(nsGkAtoms::capture, kCaptureDefault->tag, aValue);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::GetFormEnctype(nsAString& aValue) {
 | 
						|
  GetEnumAttr(nsGkAtoms::formenctype, "", kFormDefaultEnctype->tag, aValue);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::GetFormMethod(nsAString& aValue) {
 | 
						|
  GetEnumAttr(nsGkAtoms::formmethod, "", kFormDefaultMethod->tag, aValue);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::GetType(nsAString& aValue) const {
 | 
						|
  GetEnumAttr(nsGkAtoms::type, kInputDefaultType->tag, aValue);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
int32_t HTMLInputElement::TabIndexDefault() { return 0; }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
uint32_t HTMLInputElement::Height() {
 | 
						|
  if (mType != FormControlType::InputImage) {
 | 
						|
    return 0;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return GetWidthHeightForImage().height;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::SetIndeterminateInternal(bool aValue,
 | 
						|
                                                bool aShouldInvalidate) {
 | 
						|
  mIndeterminate = aValue;
 | 
						|
  if (mType != FormControlType::InputCheckbox) {
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  SetStates(ElementState::INDETERMINATE, aValue);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (aShouldInvalidate) {
 | 
						|
    // Repaint the frame
 | 
						|
    if (nsIFrame* frame = GetPrimaryFrame()) {
 | 
						|
      frame->InvalidateFrameSubtree();
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::SetIndeterminate(bool aValue) {
 | 
						|
  SetIndeterminateInternal(aValue, true);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
uint32_t HTMLInputElement::Width() {
 | 
						|
  if (mType != FormControlType::InputImage) {
 | 
						|
    return 0;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return GetWidthHeightForImage().width;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
bool HTMLInputElement::SanitizesOnValueGetter() const {
 | 
						|
  // Don't return non-sanitized value for datetime types, email, or number.
 | 
						|
  return mType == FormControlType::InputEmail ||
 | 
						|
         mType == FormControlType::InputNumber || IsDateTimeInputType(mType);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::GetValue(nsAString& aValue, CallerType aCallerType) {
 | 
						|
  GetValueInternal(aValue, aCallerType);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // In the case where we need to sanitize an input value without affecting
 | 
						|
  // the displayed user's input, we instead sanitize only on .value accesses.
 | 
						|
  // For the more general case of input elements displaying text that isn't
 | 
						|
  // their current value, see bug 805049.
 | 
						|
  if (SanitizesOnValueGetter()) {
 | 
						|
    SanitizeValue(aValue, SanitizationKind::ForValueGetter);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::GetValueInternal(nsAString& aValue,
 | 
						|
                                        CallerType aCallerType) const {
 | 
						|
  if (mType != FormControlType::InputFile) {
 | 
						|
    GetNonFileValueInternal(aValue);
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (aCallerType == CallerType::System) {
 | 
						|
    aValue.Assign(mFileData->mFirstFilePath);
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (mFileData->mFilesOrDirectories.IsEmpty()) {
 | 
						|
    aValue.Truncate();
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  nsAutoString file;
 | 
						|
  GetDOMFileOrDirectoryName(mFileData->mFilesOrDirectories[0], file);
 | 
						|
  if (file.IsEmpty()) {
 | 
						|
    aValue.Truncate();
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  aValue.AssignLiteral("C:\\fakepath\\");
 | 
						|
  aValue.Append(file);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::GetNonFileValueInternal(nsAString& aValue) const {
 | 
						|
  switch (GetValueMode()) {
 | 
						|
    case VALUE_MODE_VALUE:
 | 
						|
      if (IsSingleLineTextControl(false)) {
 | 
						|
        if (mInputData.mState) {
 | 
						|
          mInputData.mState->GetValue(aValue, true, /* aForDisplay = */ false);
 | 
						|
        } else {
 | 
						|
          // Value hasn't been set yet.
 | 
						|
          aValue.Truncate();
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
      } else if (!aValue.Assign(mInputData.mValue, fallible)) {
 | 
						|
        aValue.Truncate();
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      return;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    case VALUE_MODE_FILENAME:
 | 
						|
      MOZ_ASSERT_UNREACHABLE("Someone screwed up here");
 | 
						|
      // We'll just return empty string if someone does screw up.
 | 
						|
      aValue.Truncate();
 | 
						|
      return;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    case VALUE_MODE_DEFAULT:
 | 
						|
      // Treat defaultValue as value.
 | 
						|
      GetAttr(nsGkAtoms::value, aValue);
 | 
						|
      return;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    case VALUE_MODE_DEFAULT_ON:
 | 
						|
      // Treat default value as value and returns "on" if no value.
 | 
						|
      if (!GetAttr(nsGkAtoms::value, aValue)) {
 | 
						|
        aValue.AssignLiteral("on");
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::ClearFiles(bool aSetValueChanged) {
 | 
						|
  nsTArray<OwningFileOrDirectory> data;
 | 
						|
  SetFilesOrDirectories(data, aSetValueChanged);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
int32_t HTMLInputElement::MonthsSinceJan1970(uint32_t aYear,
 | 
						|
                                             uint32_t aMonth) const {
 | 
						|
  return (aYear - 1970) * 12 + aMonth - 1;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* static */
 | 
						|
Decimal HTMLInputElement::StringToDecimal(const nsAString& aValue) {
 | 
						|
  if (!IsAscii(aValue)) {
 | 
						|
    return Decimal::nan();
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  NS_LossyConvertUTF16toASCII asciiString(aValue);
 | 
						|
  std::string stdString(asciiString.get(), asciiString.Length());
 | 
						|
  auto decimal = Decimal::fromString(stdString);
 | 
						|
  if (!decimal.isFinite()) {
 | 
						|
    return Decimal::nan();
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  // Numbers are considered finite IEEE 754 Double-precision floating point
 | 
						|
  // values, but decimal supports a bigger range.
 | 
						|
  static const Decimal maxDouble =
 | 
						|
      Decimal::fromDouble(std::numeric_limits<double>::max());
 | 
						|
  if (decimal < -maxDouble || decimal > maxDouble) {
 | 
						|
    return Decimal::nan();
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return decimal;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
Decimal HTMLInputElement::GetValueAsDecimal() const {
 | 
						|
  nsAutoString stringValue;
 | 
						|
  GetNonFileValueInternal(stringValue);
 | 
						|
  Decimal result = mInputType->ConvertStringToNumber(stringValue).mResult;
 | 
						|
  return result.isFinite() ? result : Decimal::nan();
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::SetValue(const nsAString& aValue, CallerType aCallerType,
 | 
						|
                                ErrorResult& aRv) {
 | 
						|
  // check security.  Note that setting the value to the empty string is always
 | 
						|
  // OK and gives pages a way to clear a file input if necessary.
 | 
						|
  if (mType == FormControlType::InputFile) {
 | 
						|
    if (!aValue.IsEmpty()) {
 | 
						|
      if (aCallerType != CallerType::System) {
 | 
						|
        // setting the value of a "FILE" input widget requires
 | 
						|
        // chrome privilege
 | 
						|
        aRv.Throw(NS_ERROR_DOM_INVALID_STATE_ERR);
 | 
						|
        return;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      Sequence<nsString> list;
 | 
						|
      if (!list.AppendElement(aValue, fallible)) {
 | 
						|
        aRv.Throw(NS_ERROR_OUT_OF_MEMORY);
 | 
						|
        return;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      MozSetFileNameArray(list, aRv);
 | 
						|
      return;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    ClearFiles(true);
 | 
						|
  } else {
 | 
						|
    if (MayFireChangeOnBlur()) {
 | 
						|
      // If the value has been set by a script, we basically want to keep the
 | 
						|
      // current change event state. If the element is ready to fire a change
 | 
						|
      // event, we should keep it that way. Otherwise, we should make sure the
 | 
						|
      // element will not fire any event because of the script interaction.
 | 
						|
      //
 | 
						|
      // NOTE: this is currently quite expensive work (too much string
 | 
						|
      // manipulation). We should probably optimize that.
 | 
						|
      nsAutoString currentValue;
 | 
						|
      GetNonFileValueInternal(currentValue);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      nsresult rv = SetValueInternal(
 | 
						|
          aValue, ¤tValue,
 | 
						|
          {ValueSetterOption::ByContentAPI, ValueSetterOption::SetValueChanged,
 | 
						|
           ValueSetterOption::MoveCursorToEndIfValueChanged});
 | 
						|
      if (NS_FAILED(rv)) {
 | 
						|
        aRv.Throw(rv);
 | 
						|
        return;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      if (mFocusedValue.Equals(currentValue)) {
 | 
						|
        GetValue(mFocusedValue, aCallerType);
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    } else {
 | 
						|
      nsresult rv = SetValueInternal(
 | 
						|
          aValue,
 | 
						|
          {ValueSetterOption::ByContentAPI, ValueSetterOption::SetValueChanged,
 | 
						|
           ValueSetterOption::MoveCursorToEndIfValueChanged});
 | 
						|
      if (NS_FAILED(rv)) {
 | 
						|
        aRv.Throw(rv);
 | 
						|
        return;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
HTMLDataListElement* HTMLInputElement::GetList() const {
 | 
						|
  nsAutoString dataListId;
 | 
						|
  GetAttr(nsGkAtoms::list_, dataListId);
 | 
						|
  if (dataListId.IsEmpty()) {
 | 
						|
    return nullptr;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  DocumentOrShadowRoot* docOrShadow = GetUncomposedDocOrConnectedShadowRoot();
 | 
						|
  if (!docOrShadow) {
 | 
						|
    return nullptr;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return HTMLDataListElement::FromNodeOrNull(
 | 
						|
      docOrShadow->GetElementById(dataListId));
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::SetValue(Decimal aValue, CallerType aCallerType) {
 | 
						|
  MOZ_ASSERT(!aValue.isInfinity(), "aValue must not be Infinity!");
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (aValue.isNaN()) {
 | 
						|
    SetValue(u""_ns, aCallerType, IgnoreErrors());
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  nsAutoString value;
 | 
						|
  mInputType->ConvertNumberToString(aValue, value);
 | 
						|
  SetValue(value, aCallerType, IgnoreErrors());
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::GetValueAsDate(JSContext* aCx,
 | 
						|
                                      JS::MutableHandle<JSObject*> aObject,
 | 
						|
                                      ErrorResult& aRv) {
 | 
						|
  aObject.set(nullptr);
 | 
						|
  if (!IsDateTimeInputType(mType)) {
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  Maybe<JS::ClippedTime> time;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  switch (mType) {
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputDate: {
 | 
						|
      uint32_t year, month, day;
 | 
						|
      nsAutoString value;
 | 
						|
      GetNonFileValueInternal(value);
 | 
						|
      if (!ParseDate(value, &year, &month, &day)) {
 | 
						|
        return;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      time.emplace(JS::TimeClip(JS::MakeDate(year, month - 1, day)));
 | 
						|
      break;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputTime: {
 | 
						|
      uint32_t millisecond;
 | 
						|
      nsAutoString value;
 | 
						|
      GetNonFileValueInternal(value);
 | 
						|
      if (!ParseTime(value, &millisecond)) {
 | 
						|
        return;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      time.emplace(JS::TimeClip(millisecond));
 | 
						|
      MOZ_ASSERT(time->toDouble() == millisecond,
 | 
						|
                 "HTML times are restricted to the day after the epoch and "
 | 
						|
                 "never clip");
 | 
						|
      break;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputMonth: {
 | 
						|
      uint32_t year, month;
 | 
						|
      nsAutoString value;
 | 
						|
      GetNonFileValueInternal(value);
 | 
						|
      if (!ParseMonth(value, &year, &month)) {
 | 
						|
        return;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      time.emplace(JS::TimeClip(JS::MakeDate(year, month - 1, 1)));
 | 
						|
      break;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputWeek: {
 | 
						|
      uint32_t year, week;
 | 
						|
      nsAutoString value;
 | 
						|
      GetNonFileValueInternal(value);
 | 
						|
      if (!ParseWeek(value, &year, &week)) {
 | 
						|
        return;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      double days = DaysSinceEpochFromWeek(year, week);
 | 
						|
      time.emplace(JS::TimeClip(days * kMsPerDay));
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      break;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputDatetimeLocal: {
 | 
						|
      uint32_t year, month, day, timeInMs;
 | 
						|
      nsAutoString value;
 | 
						|
      GetNonFileValueInternal(value);
 | 
						|
      if (!ParseDateTimeLocal(value, &year, &month, &day, &timeInMs)) {
 | 
						|
        return;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      time.emplace(JS::TimeClip(JS::MakeDate(year, month - 1, day, timeInMs)));
 | 
						|
      break;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    default:
 | 
						|
      break;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (time) {
 | 
						|
    aObject.set(JS::NewDateObject(aCx, *time));
 | 
						|
    if (!aObject) {
 | 
						|
      aRv.NoteJSContextException(aCx);
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  MOZ_ASSERT(false, "Unrecognized input type");
 | 
						|
  aRv.Throw(NS_ERROR_UNEXPECTED);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::SetValueAsDate(JSContext* aCx,
 | 
						|
                                      JS::Handle<JSObject*> aObj,
 | 
						|
                                      ErrorResult& aRv) {
 | 
						|
  if (!IsDateTimeInputType(mType)) {
 | 
						|
    aRv.Throw(NS_ERROR_DOM_INVALID_STATE_ERR);
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (aObj) {
 | 
						|
    bool isDate;
 | 
						|
    if (!JS::ObjectIsDate(aCx, aObj, &isDate)) {
 | 
						|
      aRv.NoteJSContextException(aCx);
 | 
						|
      return;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    if (!isDate) {
 | 
						|
      aRv.ThrowTypeError("Value being assigned is not a date.");
 | 
						|
      return;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  double milliseconds;
 | 
						|
  if (aObj) {
 | 
						|
    if (!js::DateGetMsecSinceEpoch(aCx, aObj, &milliseconds)) {
 | 
						|
      aRv.NoteJSContextException(aCx);
 | 
						|
      return;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  } else {
 | 
						|
    milliseconds = UnspecifiedNaN<double>();
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // At this point we know we're not a file input, so we can just pass "not
 | 
						|
  // system" as the caller type, since the caller type only matters in the file
 | 
						|
  // input case.
 | 
						|
  if (std::isnan(milliseconds)) {
 | 
						|
    SetValue(u""_ns, CallerType::NonSystem, aRv);
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (mType != FormControlType::InputMonth) {
 | 
						|
    SetValue(Decimal::fromDouble(milliseconds), CallerType::NonSystem);
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // type=month expects the value to be number of months.
 | 
						|
  double year = JS::YearFromTime(milliseconds);
 | 
						|
  double month = JS::MonthFromTime(milliseconds);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (std::isnan(year) || std::isnan(month)) {
 | 
						|
    SetValue(u""_ns, CallerType::NonSystem, aRv);
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  int32_t months = MonthsSinceJan1970(year, month + 1);
 | 
						|
  SetValue(Decimal(int32_t(months)), CallerType::NonSystem);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::SetValueAsNumber(double aValueAsNumber,
 | 
						|
                                        ErrorResult& aRv) {
 | 
						|
  // TODO: return TypeError when HTMLInputElement is converted to WebIDL, see
 | 
						|
  // bug 825197.
 | 
						|
  if (std::isinf(aValueAsNumber)) {
 | 
						|
    aRv.Throw(NS_ERROR_INVALID_ARG);
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (!DoesValueAsNumberApply()) {
 | 
						|
    aRv.Throw(NS_ERROR_DOM_INVALID_STATE_ERR);
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // At this point we know we're not a file input, so we can just pass "not
 | 
						|
  // system" as the caller type, since the caller type only matters in the file
 | 
						|
  // input case.
 | 
						|
  SetValue(Decimal::fromDouble(aValueAsNumber), CallerType::NonSystem);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
Decimal HTMLInputElement::GetMinimum() const {
 | 
						|
  MOZ_ASSERT(
 | 
						|
      DoesValueAsNumberApply(),
 | 
						|
      "GetMinimum() should only be used for types that allow .valueAsNumber");
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Only type=range has a default minimum
 | 
						|
  Decimal defaultMinimum =
 | 
						|
      mType == FormControlType::InputRange ? Decimal(0) : Decimal::nan();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (!HasAttr(nsGkAtoms::min)) {
 | 
						|
    return defaultMinimum;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  nsAutoString minStr;
 | 
						|
  GetAttr(nsGkAtoms::min, minStr);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  Decimal min = mInputType->ConvertStringToNumber(minStr).mResult;
 | 
						|
  return min.isFinite() ? min : defaultMinimum;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
Decimal HTMLInputElement::GetMaximum() const {
 | 
						|
  MOZ_ASSERT(
 | 
						|
      DoesValueAsNumberApply(),
 | 
						|
      "GetMaximum() should only be used for types that allow .valueAsNumber");
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Only type=range has a default maximum
 | 
						|
  Decimal defaultMaximum =
 | 
						|
      mType == FormControlType::InputRange ? Decimal(100) : Decimal::nan();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (!HasAttr(nsGkAtoms::max)) {
 | 
						|
    return defaultMaximum;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  nsAutoString maxStr;
 | 
						|
  GetAttr(nsGkAtoms::max, maxStr);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  Decimal max = mInputType->ConvertStringToNumber(maxStr).mResult;
 | 
						|
  return max.isFinite() ? max : defaultMaximum;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
Decimal HTMLInputElement::GetStepBase() const {
 | 
						|
  MOZ_ASSERT(IsDateTimeInputType(mType) ||
 | 
						|
                 mType == FormControlType::InputNumber ||
 | 
						|
                 mType == FormControlType::InputRange,
 | 
						|
             "Check that kDefaultStepBase is correct for this new type");
 | 
						|
  // Do NOT use GetMinimum here - the spec says to use "the min content
 | 
						|
  // attribute", not "the minimum".
 | 
						|
  nsAutoString minStr;
 | 
						|
  if (GetAttr(nsGkAtoms::min, minStr)) {
 | 
						|
    Decimal min = mInputType->ConvertStringToNumber(minStr).mResult;
 | 
						|
    if (min.isFinite()) {
 | 
						|
      return min;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // If @min is not a double, we should use @value.
 | 
						|
  nsAutoString valueStr;
 | 
						|
  if (GetAttr(nsGkAtoms::value, valueStr)) {
 | 
						|
    Decimal value = mInputType->ConvertStringToNumber(valueStr).mResult;
 | 
						|
    if (value.isFinite()) {
 | 
						|
      return value;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (mType == FormControlType::InputWeek) {
 | 
						|
    return kDefaultStepBaseWeek;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return kDefaultStepBase;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
Decimal HTMLInputElement::GetValueIfStepped(int32_t aStep,
 | 
						|
                                            StepCallerType aCallerType,
 | 
						|
                                            ErrorResult& aRv) {
 | 
						|
  constexpr auto kNaN = Decimal::nan();
 | 
						|
  if (!DoStepDownStepUpApply()) {
 | 
						|
    aRv.ThrowInvalidStateError("Step doesn't apply to this input type");
 | 
						|
    return kNaN;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  Decimal stepBase = GetStepBase();
 | 
						|
  Decimal step = GetStep();
 | 
						|
  if (step == kStepAny) {
 | 
						|
    if (aCallerType != StepCallerType::ForUserEvent) {
 | 
						|
      aRv.ThrowInvalidStateError("Can't step an input with step=\"any\"");
 | 
						|
      return kNaN;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    // Allow the spin buttons and up/down arrow keys to do something sensible:
 | 
						|
    step = GetDefaultStep();
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  Decimal minimum = GetMinimum();
 | 
						|
  Decimal maximum = GetMaximum();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (!maximum.isNaN()) {
 | 
						|
    // "max - (max - stepBase) % step" is the nearest valid value to max.
 | 
						|
    maximum = maximum - NS_floorModulo(maximum - stepBase, step);
 | 
						|
    if (!minimum.isNaN()) {
 | 
						|
      if (minimum > maximum) {
 | 
						|
        // Either the minimum was greater than the maximum prior to our
 | 
						|
        // adjustment to align maximum on a step, or else (if we adjusted
 | 
						|
        // maximum) there is no valid step between minimum and the unadjusted
 | 
						|
        // maximum.
 | 
						|
        return kNaN;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  Decimal value = GetValueAsDecimal();
 | 
						|
  bool valueWasNaN = false;
 | 
						|
  if (value.isNaN()) {
 | 
						|
    value = Decimal(0);
 | 
						|
    valueWasNaN = true;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  Decimal valueBeforeStepping = value;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  Decimal deltaFromStep = NS_floorModulo(value - stepBase, step);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (deltaFromStep != Decimal(0)) {
 | 
						|
    if (aStep > 0) {
 | 
						|
      value += step - deltaFromStep;       // partial step
 | 
						|
      value += step * Decimal(aStep - 1);  // then remaining steps
 | 
						|
    } else if (aStep < 0) {
 | 
						|
      value -= deltaFromStep;              // partial step
 | 
						|
      value += step * Decimal(aStep + 1);  // then remaining steps
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  } else {
 | 
						|
    value += step * Decimal(aStep);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (value < minimum) {
 | 
						|
    value = minimum;
 | 
						|
    deltaFromStep = NS_floorModulo(value - stepBase, step);
 | 
						|
    if (deltaFromStep != Decimal(0)) {
 | 
						|
      value += step - deltaFromStep;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  if (value > maximum) {
 | 
						|
    value = maximum;
 | 
						|
    deltaFromStep = NS_floorModulo(value - stepBase, step);
 | 
						|
    if (deltaFromStep != Decimal(0)) {
 | 
						|
      value -= deltaFromStep;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (!valueWasNaN &&  // value="", resulting in us using "0"
 | 
						|
      ((aStep > 0 && value < valueBeforeStepping) ||
 | 
						|
       (aStep < 0 && value > valueBeforeStepping))) {
 | 
						|
    // We don't want step-up to effectively step down, or step-down to
 | 
						|
    // effectively step up, so return;
 | 
						|
    return kNaN;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return value;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::ApplyStep(int32_t aStep, ErrorResult& aRv) {
 | 
						|
  Decimal nextStep = GetValueIfStepped(aStep, StepCallerType::ForScript, aRv);
 | 
						|
  if (aRv.Failed() || !nextStep.isFinite()) {
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  // We know we're not a file input, so the caller type does not matter; just
 | 
						|
  // pass "not system" to be safe.
 | 
						|
  SetValue(nextStep, CallerType::NonSystem);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
bool HTMLInputElement::IsDateTimeInputType(FormControlType aType) {
 | 
						|
  switch (aType) {
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputDate:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputTime:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputMonth:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputWeek:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputDatetimeLocal:
 | 
						|
      return true;
 | 
						|
    default:
 | 
						|
      return false;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::MozGetFileNameArray(nsTArray<nsString>& aArray,
 | 
						|
                                           ErrorResult& aRv) {
 | 
						|
  if (NS_WARN_IF(mType != FormControlType::InputFile)) {
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  const nsTArray<OwningFileOrDirectory>& filesOrDirs =
 | 
						|
      GetFilesOrDirectoriesInternal();
 | 
						|
  for (uint32_t i = 0; i < filesOrDirs.Length(); i++) {
 | 
						|
    nsAutoString str;
 | 
						|
    GetDOMFileOrDirectoryPath(filesOrDirs[i], str, aRv);
 | 
						|
    if (NS_WARN_IF(aRv.Failed())) {
 | 
						|
      return;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    aArray.AppendElement(str);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::MozSetFileArray(
 | 
						|
    const Sequence<OwningNonNull<File>>& aFiles) {
 | 
						|
  if (NS_WARN_IF(mType != FormControlType::InputFile)) {
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  nsCOMPtr<nsIGlobalObject> global = OwnerDoc()->GetScopeObject();
 | 
						|
  MOZ_ASSERT(global);
 | 
						|
  if (!global) {
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  nsTArray<OwningFileOrDirectory> files;
 | 
						|
  for (uint32_t i = 0; i < aFiles.Length(); ++i) {
 | 
						|
    RefPtr<File> file = File::Create(global, aFiles[i].get()->Impl());
 | 
						|
    if (NS_WARN_IF(!file)) {
 | 
						|
      return;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    OwningFileOrDirectory* element = files.AppendElement();
 | 
						|
    element->SetAsFile() = file;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  SetFilesOrDirectories(files, true);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::MozSetFileNameArray(const Sequence<nsString>& aFileNames,
 | 
						|
                                           ErrorResult& aRv) {
 | 
						|
  if (NS_WARN_IF(mType != FormControlType::InputFile)) {
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (XRE_IsContentProcess()) {
 | 
						|
    aRv.Throw(NS_ERROR_DOM_NOT_SUPPORTED_ERR);
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  nsTArray<OwningFileOrDirectory> files;
 | 
						|
  for (uint32_t i = 0; i < aFileNames.Length(); ++i) {
 | 
						|
    nsCOMPtr<nsIFile> file;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    if (StringBeginsWith(aFileNames[i], u"file:"_ns,
 | 
						|
                         nsASCIICaseInsensitiveStringComparator)) {
 | 
						|
      // Converts the URL string into the corresponding nsIFile if possible
 | 
						|
      // A local file will be created if the URL string begins with file://
 | 
						|
      NS_GetFileFromURLSpec(NS_ConvertUTF16toUTF8(aFileNames[i]),
 | 
						|
                            getter_AddRefs(file));
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    if (!file) {
 | 
						|
      // this is no "file://", try as local file
 | 
						|
      NS_NewLocalFile(aFileNames[i], false, getter_AddRefs(file));
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    if (!file) {
 | 
						|
      continue;  // Not much we can do if the file doesn't exist
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    nsCOMPtr<nsIGlobalObject> global = OwnerDoc()->GetScopeObject();
 | 
						|
    if (!global) {
 | 
						|
      aRv.Throw(NS_ERROR_FAILURE);
 | 
						|
      return;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    RefPtr<File> domFile = File::CreateFromFile(global, file);
 | 
						|
    if (NS_WARN_IF(!domFile)) {
 | 
						|
      aRv.Throw(NS_ERROR_FAILURE);
 | 
						|
      return;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    OwningFileOrDirectory* element = files.AppendElement();
 | 
						|
    element->SetAsFile() = domFile;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  SetFilesOrDirectories(files, true);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::MozSetDirectory(const nsAString& aDirectoryPath,
 | 
						|
                                       ErrorResult& aRv) {
 | 
						|
  if (NS_WARN_IF(mType != FormControlType::InputFile)) {
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  nsCOMPtr<nsIFile> file;
 | 
						|
  aRv = NS_NewLocalFile(aDirectoryPath, true, getter_AddRefs(file));
 | 
						|
  if (NS_WARN_IF(aRv.Failed())) {
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  nsPIDOMWindowInner* window = OwnerDoc()->GetInnerWindow();
 | 
						|
  if (NS_WARN_IF(!window)) {
 | 
						|
    aRv.Throw(NS_ERROR_FAILURE);
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  RefPtr<Directory> directory = Directory::Create(window->AsGlobal(), file);
 | 
						|
  MOZ_ASSERT(directory);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  nsTArray<OwningFileOrDirectory> array;
 | 
						|
  OwningFileOrDirectory* element = array.AppendElement();
 | 
						|
  element->SetAsDirectory() = directory;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  SetFilesOrDirectories(array, true);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::GetDateTimeInputBoxValue(DateTimeValue& aValue) {
 | 
						|
  if (NS_WARN_IF(!IsDateTimeInputType(mType)) || !mDateTimeInputBoxValue) {
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  aValue = *mDateTimeInputBoxValue;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
Element* HTMLInputElement::GetDateTimeBoxElement() {
 | 
						|
  if (!GetShadowRoot()) {
 | 
						|
    return nullptr;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // The datetimebox <div> is the only child of the UA Widget Shadow Root
 | 
						|
  // if it is present.
 | 
						|
  MOZ_ASSERT(GetShadowRoot()->IsUAWidget());
 | 
						|
  MOZ_ASSERT(1 >= GetShadowRoot()->GetChildCount());
 | 
						|
  if (nsIContent* inputAreaContent = GetShadowRoot()->GetFirstChild()) {
 | 
						|
    return inputAreaContent->AsElement();
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return nullptr;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::OpenDateTimePicker(const DateTimeValue& aInitialValue) {
 | 
						|
  if (NS_WARN_IF(!IsDateTimeInputType(mType))) {
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  mDateTimeInputBoxValue = MakeUnique<DateTimeValue>(aInitialValue);
 | 
						|
  nsContentUtils::DispatchChromeEvent(OwnerDoc(), static_cast<Element*>(this),
 | 
						|
                                      u"MozOpenDateTimePicker"_ns,
 | 
						|
                                      CanBubble::eYes, Cancelable::eYes);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::UpdateDateTimePicker(const DateTimeValue& aValue) {
 | 
						|
  if (NS_WARN_IF(!IsDateTimeInputType(mType))) {
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  mDateTimeInputBoxValue = MakeUnique<DateTimeValue>(aValue);
 | 
						|
  nsContentUtils::DispatchChromeEvent(OwnerDoc(), static_cast<Element*>(this),
 | 
						|
                                      u"MozUpdateDateTimePicker"_ns,
 | 
						|
                                      CanBubble::eYes, Cancelable::eYes);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::CloseDateTimePicker() {
 | 
						|
  if (NS_WARN_IF(!IsDateTimeInputType(mType))) {
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  nsContentUtils::DispatchChromeEvent(OwnerDoc(), static_cast<Element*>(this),
 | 
						|
                                      u"MozCloseDateTimePicker"_ns,
 | 
						|
                                      CanBubble::eYes, Cancelable::eYes);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::SetFocusState(bool aIsFocused) {
 | 
						|
  if (NS_WARN_IF(!IsDateTimeInputType(mType))) {
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  SetStates(ElementState::FOCUS | ElementState::FOCUSRING, aIsFocused);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::UpdateValidityState() {
 | 
						|
  if (NS_WARN_IF(!IsDateTimeInputType(mType))) {
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // For now, datetime input box call this function only when the value may
 | 
						|
  // become valid/invalid. For other validity states, they will be updated when
 | 
						|
  // .value is actually changed.
 | 
						|
  UpdateBadInputValidityState();
 | 
						|
  UpdateValidityElementStates(true);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
bool HTMLInputElement::MozIsTextField(bool aExcludePassword) {
 | 
						|
  // TODO: temporary until bug 888320 is fixed.
 | 
						|
  //
 | 
						|
  // FIXME: Historically we never returned true for `number`, we should consider
 | 
						|
  // changing that now that it is similar to other inputs.
 | 
						|
  if (IsDateTimeInputType(mType) || mType == FormControlType::InputNumber) {
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return IsSingleLineTextControl(aExcludePassword);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::SetUserInput(const nsAString& aValue,
 | 
						|
                                    nsIPrincipal& aSubjectPrincipal) {
 | 
						|
  AutoHandlingUserInputStatePusher inputStatePusher(true);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (mType == FormControlType::InputFile &&
 | 
						|
      !aSubjectPrincipal.IsSystemPrincipal()) {
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (mType == FormControlType::InputFile) {
 | 
						|
    Sequence<nsString> list;
 | 
						|
    if (!list.AppendElement(aValue, fallible)) {
 | 
						|
      return;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    MozSetFileNameArray(list, IgnoreErrors());
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  bool isInputEventDispatchedByTextControlState =
 | 
						|
      GetValueMode() == VALUE_MODE_VALUE && IsSingleLineTextControl(false);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  nsresult rv = SetValueInternal(
 | 
						|
      aValue,
 | 
						|
      {ValueSetterOption::BySetUserInputAPI, ValueSetterOption::SetValueChanged,
 | 
						|
       ValueSetterOption::MoveCursorToEndIfValueChanged});
 | 
						|
  NS_ENSURE_SUCCESS_VOID(rv);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (!isInputEventDispatchedByTextControlState) {
 | 
						|
    DebugOnly<nsresult> rvIgnored = nsContentUtils::DispatchInputEvent(this);
 | 
						|
    NS_WARNING_ASSERTION(NS_SUCCEEDED(rvIgnored),
 | 
						|
                         "Failed to dispatch input event");
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // If this element is not currently focused, it won't receive a change event
 | 
						|
  // for this update through the normal channels. So fire a change event
 | 
						|
  // immediately, instead.
 | 
						|
  if (CreatesDateTimeWidget() || !ShouldBlur(this)) {
 | 
						|
    FireChangeEventIfNeeded();
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
nsIEditor* HTMLInputElement::GetEditorForBindings() {
 | 
						|
  if (!GetPrimaryFrame()) {
 | 
						|
    // Ensure we construct frames (and thus an editor) if needed.
 | 
						|
    GetPrimaryFrame(FlushType::Frames);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return GetTextEditorFromState();
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
bool HTMLInputElement::HasEditor() const {
 | 
						|
  return !!GetTextEditorWithoutCreation();
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
TextEditor* HTMLInputElement::GetTextEditorFromState() {
 | 
						|
  TextControlState* state = GetEditorState();
 | 
						|
  if (state) {
 | 
						|
    return state->GetTextEditor();
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return nullptr;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
TextEditor* HTMLInputElement::GetTextEditor() {
 | 
						|
  return GetTextEditorFromState();
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
TextEditor* HTMLInputElement::GetTextEditorWithoutCreation() const {
 | 
						|
  TextControlState* state = GetEditorState();
 | 
						|
  if (!state) {
 | 
						|
    return nullptr;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return state->GetTextEditorWithoutCreation();
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
nsISelectionController* HTMLInputElement::GetSelectionController() {
 | 
						|
  TextControlState* state = GetEditorState();
 | 
						|
  if (state) {
 | 
						|
    return state->GetSelectionController();
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return nullptr;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
nsFrameSelection* HTMLInputElement::GetConstFrameSelection() {
 | 
						|
  TextControlState* state = GetEditorState();
 | 
						|
  if (state) {
 | 
						|
    return state->GetConstFrameSelection();
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return nullptr;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
nsresult HTMLInputElement::BindToFrame(nsTextControlFrame* aFrame) {
 | 
						|
  MOZ_ASSERT(!nsContentUtils::IsSafeToRunScript());
 | 
						|
  TextControlState* state = GetEditorState();
 | 
						|
  if (state) {
 | 
						|
    return state->BindToFrame(aFrame);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return NS_ERROR_FAILURE;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::UnbindFromFrame(nsTextControlFrame* aFrame) {
 | 
						|
  TextControlState* state = GetEditorState();
 | 
						|
  if (state && aFrame) {
 | 
						|
    state->UnbindFromFrame(aFrame);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
nsresult HTMLInputElement::CreateEditor() {
 | 
						|
  TextControlState* state = GetEditorState();
 | 
						|
  if (state) {
 | 
						|
    return state->PrepareEditor();
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return NS_ERROR_FAILURE;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::SetPreviewValue(const nsAString& aValue) {
 | 
						|
  TextControlState* state = GetEditorState();
 | 
						|
  if (state) {
 | 
						|
    state->SetPreviewText(aValue, true);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::GetPreviewValue(nsAString& aValue) {
 | 
						|
  TextControlState* state = GetEditorState();
 | 
						|
  if (state) {
 | 
						|
    state->GetPreviewText(aValue);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::EnablePreview() {
 | 
						|
  if (mIsPreviewEnabled) {
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  mIsPreviewEnabled = true;
 | 
						|
  // Reconstruct the frame to append an anonymous preview node
 | 
						|
  nsLayoutUtils::PostRestyleEvent(this, RestyleHint{0},
 | 
						|
                                  nsChangeHint_ReconstructFrame);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
bool HTMLInputElement::IsPreviewEnabled() { return mIsPreviewEnabled; }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::GetDisplayFileName(nsAString& aValue) const {
 | 
						|
  MOZ_ASSERT(mFileData);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (OwnerDoc()->IsStaticDocument()) {
 | 
						|
    aValue = mFileData->mStaticDocFileList;
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (mFileData->mFilesOrDirectories.Length() == 1) {
 | 
						|
    GetDOMFileOrDirectoryName(mFileData->mFilesOrDirectories[0], aValue);
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  nsAutoString value;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (mFileData->mFilesOrDirectories.IsEmpty()) {
 | 
						|
    if (StaticPrefs::dom_webkitBlink_dirPicker_enabled() &&
 | 
						|
        HasAttr(nsGkAtoms::webkitdirectory)) {
 | 
						|
      nsContentUtils::GetMaybeLocalizedString(nsContentUtils::eFORMS_PROPERTIES,
 | 
						|
                                              "NoDirSelected", OwnerDoc(),
 | 
						|
                                              value);
 | 
						|
    } else if (HasAttr(nsGkAtoms::multiple)) {
 | 
						|
      nsContentUtils::GetMaybeLocalizedString(nsContentUtils::eFORMS_PROPERTIES,
 | 
						|
                                              "NoFilesSelected", OwnerDoc(),
 | 
						|
                                              value);
 | 
						|
    } else {
 | 
						|
      nsContentUtils::GetMaybeLocalizedString(nsContentUtils::eFORMS_PROPERTIES,
 | 
						|
                                              "NoFileSelected", OwnerDoc(),
 | 
						|
                                              value);
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  } else {
 | 
						|
    nsString count;
 | 
						|
    count.AppendInt(int(mFileData->mFilesOrDirectories.Length()));
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    nsContentUtils::FormatMaybeLocalizedString(
 | 
						|
        value, nsContentUtils::eFORMS_PROPERTIES, "XFilesSelected", OwnerDoc(),
 | 
						|
        count);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  aValue = value;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
const nsTArray<OwningFileOrDirectory>&
 | 
						|
HTMLInputElement::GetFilesOrDirectoriesInternal() const {
 | 
						|
  return mFileData->mFilesOrDirectories;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::SetFilesOrDirectories(
 | 
						|
    const nsTArray<OwningFileOrDirectory>& aFilesOrDirectories,
 | 
						|
    bool aSetValueChanged) {
 | 
						|
  if (NS_WARN_IF(mType != FormControlType::InputFile)) {
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  MOZ_ASSERT(mFileData);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  mFileData->ClearGetFilesHelpers();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (StaticPrefs::dom_webkitBlink_filesystem_enabled()) {
 | 
						|
    HTMLInputElement_Binding::ClearCachedWebkitEntriesValue(this);
 | 
						|
    mFileData->mEntries.Clear();
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  mFileData->mFilesOrDirectories.Clear();
 | 
						|
  mFileData->mFilesOrDirectories.AppendElements(aFilesOrDirectories);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  AfterSetFilesOrDirectories(aSetValueChanged);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::SetFiles(FileList* aFiles, bool aSetValueChanged) {
 | 
						|
  MOZ_ASSERT(mFileData);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  mFileData->mFilesOrDirectories.Clear();
 | 
						|
  mFileData->ClearGetFilesHelpers();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (StaticPrefs::dom_webkitBlink_filesystem_enabled()) {
 | 
						|
    HTMLInputElement_Binding::ClearCachedWebkitEntriesValue(this);
 | 
						|
    mFileData->mEntries.Clear();
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (aFiles) {
 | 
						|
    uint32_t listLength = aFiles->Length();
 | 
						|
    for (uint32_t i = 0; i < listLength; i++) {
 | 
						|
      OwningFileOrDirectory* element =
 | 
						|
          mFileData->mFilesOrDirectories.AppendElement();
 | 
						|
      element->SetAsFile() = aFiles->Item(i);
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  AfterSetFilesOrDirectories(aSetValueChanged);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
// This method is used for testing only.
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::MozSetDndFilesAndDirectories(
 | 
						|
    const nsTArray<OwningFileOrDirectory>& aFilesOrDirectories) {
 | 
						|
  if (NS_WARN_IF(mType != FormControlType::InputFile)) {
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  SetFilesOrDirectories(aFilesOrDirectories, true);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (StaticPrefs::dom_webkitBlink_filesystem_enabled()) {
 | 
						|
    UpdateEntries(aFilesOrDirectories);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  RefPtr<DispatchChangeEventCallback> dispatchChangeEventCallback =
 | 
						|
      new DispatchChangeEventCallback(this);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (StaticPrefs::dom_webkitBlink_dirPicker_enabled() &&
 | 
						|
      HasAttr(nsGkAtoms::webkitdirectory)) {
 | 
						|
    ErrorResult rv;
 | 
						|
    GetFilesHelper* helper =
 | 
						|
        GetOrCreateGetFilesHelper(true /* recursionFlag */, rv);
 | 
						|
    if (NS_WARN_IF(rv.Failed())) {
 | 
						|
      rv.SuppressException();
 | 
						|
      return;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    helper->AddCallback(dispatchChangeEventCallback);
 | 
						|
  } else {
 | 
						|
    dispatchChangeEventCallback->DispatchEvents();
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::AfterSetFilesOrDirectories(bool aSetValueChanged) {
 | 
						|
  // No need to flush here, if there's no frame at this point we
 | 
						|
  // don't need to force creation of one just to tell it about this
 | 
						|
  // new value.  We just want the display to update as needed.
 | 
						|
  nsIFormControlFrame* formControlFrame = GetFormControlFrame(false);
 | 
						|
  if (formControlFrame) {
 | 
						|
    nsAutoString readableValue;
 | 
						|
    GetDisplayFileName(readableValue);
 | 
						|
    formControlFrame->SetFormProperty(nsGkAtoms::value, readableValue);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Grab the full path here for any chrome callers who access our .value via a
 | 
						|
  // CPOW. This path won't be called from a CPOW meaning the potential sync IPC
 | 
						|
  // call under GetMozFullPath won't be rejected for not being urgent.
 | 
						|
  if (mFileData->mFilesOrDirectories.IsEmpty()) {
 | 
						|
    mFileData->mFirstFilePath.Truncate();
 | 
						|
  } else {
 | 
						|
    ErrorResult rv;
 | 
						|
    GetDOMFileOrDirectoryPath(mFileData->mFilesOrDirectories[0],
 | 
						|
                              mFileData->mFirstFilePath, rv);
 | 
						|
    if (NS_WARN_IF(rv.Failed())) {
 | 
						|
      rv.SuppressException();
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Null out |mFileData->mFileList| to return a new file list when asked for.
 | 
						|
  // Don't clear it since the file list might come from the user via SetFiles.
 | 
						|
  if (mFileData->mFileList) {
 | 
						|
    mFileData->mFileList = nullptr;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (aSetValueChanged) {
 | 
						|
    SetValueChanged(true);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  UpdateAllValidityStates(true);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::FireChangeEventIfNeeded() {
 | 
						|
  if (!MayFireChangeOnBlur()) {
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // We're not exposing the GetValue return value anywhere here, so it's safe to
 | 
						|
  // claim to be a system caller.
 | 
						|
  nsAutoString value;
 | 
						|
  GetValue(value, CallerType::System);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // NOTE(emilio): Per spec we should not set this if we don't fire the change
 | 
						|
  // event, but that seems like a bug. Using mValueChanged seems reasonable to
 | 
						|
  // keep the expected behavior while
 | 
						|
  // https://github.com/whatwg/html/issues/10013 is resolved.
 | 
						|
  if (mValueChanged) {
 | 
						|
    SetUserInteracted(true);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  if (mFocusedValue.Equals(value)) {
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  // Dispatch the change event.
 | 
						|
  mFocusedValue = value;
 | 
						|
  nsContentUtils::DispatchTrustedEvent(
 | 
						|
      OwnerDoc(), static_cast<nsIContent*>(this), u"change"_ns, CanBubble::eYes,
 | 
						|
      Cancelable::eNo);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
FileList* HTMLInputElement::GetFiles() {
 | 
						|
  if (mType != FormControlType::InputFile) {
 | 
						|
    return nullptr;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (!mFileData->mFileList) {
 | 
						|
    mFileData->mFileList = new FileList(static_cast<nsIContent*>(this));
 | 
						|
    for (const OwningFileOrDirectory& item : GetFilesOrDirectoriesInternal()) {
 | 
						|
      if (item.IsFile()) {
 | 
						|
        mFileData->mFileList->Append(item.GetAsFile());
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return mFileData->mFileList;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::SetFiles(FileList* aFiles) {
 | 
						|
  if (mType != FormControlType::InputFile || !aFiles) {
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Update |mFileData->mFilesOrDirectories|
 | 
						|
  SetFiles(aFiles, true);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  MOZ_ASSERT(!mFileData->mFileList, "Should've cleared the existing file list");
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Update |mFileData->mFileList| without copy
 | 
						|
  mFileData->mFileList = aFiles;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* static */
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::HandleNumberControlSpin(void* aData) {
 | 
						|
  RefPtr<HTMLInputElement> input = static_cast<HTMLInputElement*>(aData);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  NS_ASSERTION(input->mNumberControlSpinnerIsSpinning,
 | 
						|
               "Should have called nsRepeatService::Stop()");
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  nsNumberControlFrame* numberControlFrame =
 | 
						|
      do_QueryFrame(input->GetPrimaryFrame());
 | 
						|
  if (input->mType != FormControlType::InputNumber || !numberControlFrame) {
 | 
						|
    // Type has changed (and possibly our frame type hasn't been updated yet)
 | 
						|
    // or else we've lost our frame. Either way, stop the timer and don't do
 | 
						|
    // anything else.
 | 
						|
    input->StopNumberControlSpinnerSpin();
 | 
						|
  } else {
 | 
						|
    input->StepNumberControlForUserEvent(
 | 
						|
        input->mNumberControlSpinnerSpinsUp ? 1 : -1);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
nsresult HTMLInputElement::SetValueInternal(
 | 
						|
    const nsAString& aValue, const nsAString* aOldValue,
 | 
						|
    const ValueSetterOptions& aOptions) {
 | 
						|
  MOZ_ASSERT(GetValueMode() != VALUE_MODE_FILENAME,
 | 
						|
             "Don't call SetValueInternal for file inputs");
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // We want to remember if the SetValueInternal() call is being made for a XUL
 | 
						|
  // element.  We do that by looking at the parent node here, and if that node
 | 
						|
  // is a XUL node, we consider our control a XUL control. XUL controls preserve
 | 
						|
  // edit history across value setters.
 | 
						|
  //
 | 
						|
  // TODO(emilio): Rather than doing this maybe add an attribute instead and
 | 
						|
  // read it only on chrome docs or something? That'd allow front-end code to
 | 
						|
  // move away from xul without weird side-effects.
 | 
						|
  const bool forcePreserveUndoHistory = mParent && mParent->IsXULElement();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  switch (GetValueMode()) {
 | 
						|
    case VALUE_MODE_VALUE: {
 | 
						|
      // At the moment, only single line text control have to sanitize their
 | 
						|
      // value Because we have to create a new string for that, we should
 | 
						|
      // prevent doing it if it's useless.
 | 
						|
      nsAutoString value(aValue);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      if (mDoneCreating &&
 | 
						|
          !(mType == FormControlType::InputNumber &&
 | 
						|
            aOptions.contains(ValueSetterOption::BySetUserInputAPI))) {
 | 
						|
        // When the value of a number input is set by a script, we need to make
 | 
						|
        // sure the value is a valid floating-point number.
 | 
						|
        // https://html.spec.whatwg.org/#valid-floating-point-number
 | 
						|
        // When it's set by a user, however, we need to be more permissive, so
 | 
						|
        // we don't sanitize its value here. See bug 1839572.
 | 
						|
        SanitizeValue(value, SanitizationKind::ForValueSetter);
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      // else DoneCreatingElement calls us again once mDoneCreating is true
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      const bool setValueChanged =
 | 
						|
          aOptions.contains(ValueSetterOption::SetValueChanged);
 | 
						|
      if (setValueChanged) {
 | 
						|
        SetValueChanged(true);
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      if (IsSingleLineTextControl(false)) {
 | 
						|
        // Note that if aOptions includes
 | 
						|
        // ValueSetterOption::BySetUserInputAPI, "input" event is automatically
 | 
						|
        // dispatched by TextControlState::SetValue(). If you'd change condition
 | 
						|
        // of calling this method, you need to maintain SetUserInput() too. FYI:
 | 
						|
        // After calling SetValue(), the input type might have been
 | 
						|
        //      modified so that mInputData may not store TextControlState.
 | 
						|
        EnsureEditorState();
 | 
						|
        if (!mInputData.mState->SetValue(
 | 
						|
                value, aOldValue,
 | 
						|
                forcePreserveUndoHistory
 | 
						|
                    ? aOptions + ValueSetterOption::PreserveUndoHistory
 | 
						|
                    : aOptions)) {
 | 
						|
          return NS_ERROR_OUT_OF_MEMORY;
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
        // If the caller won't dispatch "input" event via
 | 
						|
        // nsContentUtils::DispatchInputEvent(), we need to modify
 | 
						|
        // validationMessage value here.
 | 
						|
        //
 | 
						|
        // FIXME(emilio): ValueSetterOption::ByInternalAPI is not supposed to
 | 
						|
        // change state, but maybe we could run this too?
 | 
						|
        if (aOptions.contains(ValueSetterOption::ByContentAPI)) {
 | 
						|
          MaybeUpdateAllValidityStates(!mDoneCreating);
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
      } else {
 | 
						|
        free(mInputData.mValue);
 | 
						|
        mInputData.mValue = ToNewUnicode(value);
 | 
						|
        if (setValueChanged) {
 | 
						|
          SetValueChanged(true);
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
        if (mType == FormControlType::InputRange) {
 | 
						|
          nsRangeFrame* frame = do_QueryFrame(GetPrimaryFrame());
 | 
						|
          if (frame) {
 | 
						|
            frame->UpdateForValueChange();
 | 
						|
          }
 | 
						|
        } else if (CreatesDateTimeWidget() &&
 | 
						|
                   !aOptions.contains(ValueSetterOption::BySetUserInputAPI)) {
 | 
						|
          if (Element* dateTimeBoxElement = GetDateTimeBoxElement()) {
 | 
						|
            AsyncEventDispatcher::RunDOMEventWhenSafe(
 | 
						|
                *dateTimeBoxElement, u"MozDateTimeValueChanged"_ns,
 | 
						|
                CanBubble::eNo, ChromeOnlyDispatch::eNo);
 | 
						|
          }
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
        if (mDoneCreating) {
 | 
						|
          OnValueChanged(ValueChangeKind::Internal, value.IsEmpty(), &value);
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
        // else DoneCreatingElement calls us again once mDoneCreating is true
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      if (mType == FormControlType::InputColor) {
 | 
						|
        // Update color frame, to reflect color changes
 | 
						|
        nsColorControlFrame* colorControlFrame =
 | 
						|
            do_QueryFrame(GetPrimaryFrame());
 | 
						|
        if (colorControlFrame) {
 | 
						|
          colorControlFrame->UpdateColor();
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      return NS_OK;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    case VALUE_MODE_DEFAULT:
 | 
						|
    case VALUE_MODE_DEFAULT_ON:
 | 
						|
      // If the value of a hidden input was changed, we mark it changed so that
 | 
						|
      // we will know we need to save / restore the value.  Yes, we are
 | 
						|
      // overloading the meaning of ValueChanged just a teensy bit to save a
 | 
						|
      // measly byte of storage space in HTMLInputElement.  Yes, you are free to
 | 
						|
      // make a new flag, NEED_TO_SAVE_VALUE, at such time as mBitField becomes
 | 
						|
      // a 16-bit value.
 | 
						|
      if (mType == FormControlType::InputHidden) {
 | 
						|
        SetValueChanged(true);
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      // Make sure to keep track of the last value change not being interactive,
 | 
						|
      // just in case this used to be another kind of editable input before.
 | 
						|
      // Note that a checked change _could_ really be interactive, but we don't
 | 
						|
      // keep track of that elsewhere so seems fine to just do this.
 | 
						|
      SetLastValueChangeWasInteractive(false);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      // Treat value == defaultValue for other input elements.
 | 
						|
      return nsGenericHTMLFormControlElementWithState::SetAttr(
 | 
						|
          kNameSpaceID_None, nsGkAtoms::value, aValue, true);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    case VALUE_MODE_FILENAME:
 | 
						|
      return NS_ERROR_UNEXPECTED;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // This return statement is required for some compilers.
 | 
						|
  return NS_OK;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::SetValueChanged(bool aValueChanged) {
 | 
						|
  if (mValueChanged == aValueChanged) {
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  mValueChanged = aValueChanged;
 | 
						|
  UpdateTooLongValidityState();
 | 
						|
  UpdateTooShortValidityState();
 | 
						|
  UpdateValidityElementStates(true);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::SetLastValueChangeWasInteractive(bool aWasInteractive) {
 | 
						|
  if (aWasInteractive == mLastValueChangeWasInteractive) {
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  mLastValueChangeWasInteractive = aWasInteractive;
 | 
						|
  const bool wasValid = IsValid();
 | 
						|
  UpdateTooLongValidityState();
 | 
						|
  UpdateTooShortValidityState();
 | 
						|
  if (wasValid != IsValid()) {
 | 
						|
    UpdateValidityElementStates(true);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::SetCheckedChanged(bool aCheckedChanged) {
 | 
						|
  DoSetCheckedChanged(aCheckedChanged, true);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::DoSetCheckedChanged(bool aCheckedChanged, bool aNotify) {
 | 
						|
  if (mType == FormControlType::InputRadio) {
 | 
						|
    if (mCheckedChanged != aCheckedChanged) {
 | 
						|
      nsCOMPtr<nsIRadioVisitor> visitor =
 | 
						|
          new nsRadioSetCheckedChangedVisitor(aCheckedChanged);
 | 
						|
      VisitGroup(visitor);
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  } else {
 | 
						|
    SetCheckedChangedInternal(aCheckedChanged);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::SetCheckedChangedInternal(bool aCheckedChanged) {
 | 
						|
  if (mCheckedChanged == aCheckedChanged) {
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  mCheckedChanged = aCheckedChanged;
 | 
						|
  UpdateValidityElementStates(true);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::SetChecked(bool aChecked) {
 | 
						|
  DoSetChecked(aChecked, true, true);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::DoSetChecked(bool aChecked, bool aNotify,
 | 
						|
                                    bool aSetValueChanged) {
 | 
						|
  // If the user or JS attempts to set checked, whether it actually changes the
 | 
						|
  // value or not, we say the value was changed so that defaultValue don't
 | 
						|
  // affect it no more.
 | 
						|
  if (aSetValueChanged) {
 | 
						|
    DoSetCheckedChanged(true, aNotify);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Don't do anything if we're not changing whether it's checked (it would
 | 
						|
  // screw up state actually, especially when you are setting radio button to
 | 
						|
  // false)
 | 
						|
  if (mChecked == aChecked) {
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Set checked
 | 
						|
  if (mType != FormControlType::InputRadio) {
 | 
						|
    SetCheckedInternal(aChecked, aNotify);
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // For radio button, we need to do some extra fun stuff
 | 
						|
  if (aChecked) {
 | 
						|
    RadioSetChecked(aNotify);
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (auto* container = GetCurrentRadioGroupContainer()) {
 | 
						|
    nsAutoString name;
 | 
						|
    GetAttr(nsGkAtoms::name, name);
 | 
						|
    container->SetCurrentRadioButton(name, nullptr);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  // SetCheckedInternal is going to ask all radios to update their
 | 
						|
  // validity state. We have to be sure the radio group container knows
 | 
						|
  // the currently selected radio.
 | 
						|
  SetCheckedInternal(false, aNotify);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::RadioSetChecked(bool aNotify) {
 | 
						|
  // Find the selected radio button so we can deselect it
 | 
						|
  HTMLInputElement* currentlySelected = GetSelectedRadioButton();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Deselect the currently selected radio button
 | 
						|
  if (currentlySelected) {
 | 
						|
    // Pass true for the aNotify parameter since the currently selected
 | 
						|
    // button is already in the document.
 | 
						|
    currentlySelected->SetCheckedInternal(false, true);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Let the group know that we are now the One True Radio Button
 | 
						|
  if (auto* container = GetCurrentRadioGroupContainer()) {
 | 
						|
    nsAutoString name;
 | 
						|
    GetAttr(nsGkAtoms::name, name);
 | 
						|
    container->SetCurrentRadioButton(name, this);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // SetCheckedInternal is going to ask all radios to update their
 | 
						|
  // validity state.
 | 
						|
  SetCheckedInternal(true, aNotify);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
RadioGroupContainer* HTMLInputElement::GetCurrentRadioGroupContainer() const {
 | 
						|
  NS_ASSERTION(
 | 
						|
      mType == FormControlType::InputRadio,
 | 
						|
      "GetRadioGroupContainer should only be called when type='radio'");
 | 
						|
  return mRadioGroupContainer;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
RadioGroupContainer* HTMLInputElement::FindTreeRadioGroupContainer() const {
 | 
						|
  nsAutoString name;
 | 
						|
  GetAttr(nsGkAtoms::name, name);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (name.IsEmpty()) {
 | 
						|
    return nullptr;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  if (mForm) {
 | 
						|
    return &mForm->OwnedRadioGroupContainer();
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  if (IsInNativeAnonymousSubtree()) {
 | 
						|
    return nullptr;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  if (Document* doc = GetUncomposedDoc()) {
 | 
						|
    return &doc->OwnedRadioGroupContainer();
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return &static_cast<FragmentOrElement*>(SubtreeRoot())
 | 
						|
              ->OwnedRadioGroupContainer();
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::DisconnectRadioGroupContainer() {
 | 
						|
  mRadioGroupContainer = nullptr;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
HTMLInputElement* HTMLInputElement::GetSelectedRadioButton() const {
 | 
						|
  auto* container = GetCurrentRadioGroupContainer();
 | 
						|
  if (!container) {
 | 
						|
    return nullptr;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  nsAutoString name;
 | 
						|
  GetAttr(nsGkAtoms::name, name);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return container->GetCurrentRadioButton(name);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::MaybeSubmitForm(nsPresContext* aPresContext) {
 | 
						|
  if (!mForm) {
 | 
						|
    // Nothing to do here.
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  RefPtr<PresShell> presShell = aPresContext->GetPresShell();
 | 
						|
  if (!presShell) {
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Get the default submit element
 | 
						|
  if (RefPtr<nsGenericHTMLFormElement> submitContent =
 | 
						|
          mForm->GetDefaultSubmitElement()) {
 | 
						|
    Maybe<WidgetPointerEvent> pointerEvent;
 | 
						|
    Maybe<WidgetMouseEvent> mouseEvent;
 | 
						|
    if (StaticPrefs::dom_w3c_pointer_events_dispatch_click_as_pointer_event()) {
 | 
						|
      pointerEvent.emplace(true, ePointerClick, nullptr);
 | 
						|
    } else {
 | 
						|
      mouseEvent.emplace(true, ePointerClick, nullptr, WidgetMouseEvent::eReal);
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    WidgetMouseEvent& event =
 | 
						|
        pointerEvent.isSome() ? pointerEvent.ref() : mouseEvent.ref();
 | 
						|
    event.mInputSource = MouseEvent_Binding::MOZ_SOURCE_KEYBOARD;
 | 
						|
    // pointerId definition in Pointer Events:
 | 
						|
    // > The pointerId value of -1 MUST be reserved and used to indicate events
 | 
						|
    // > that were generated by something other than a pointing device.
 | 
						|
    event.pointerId = -1;
 | 
						|
    nsEventStatus status = nsEventStatus_eIgnore;
 | 
						|
    presShell->HandleDOMEventWithTarget(submitContent, &event, &status);
 | 
						|
  } else if (!mForm->ImplicitSubmissionIsDisabled()) {
 | 
						|
    // If there's only one text control, just submit the form
 | 
						|
    // Hold strong ref across the event
 | 
						|
    RefPtr<dom::HTMLFormElement> form(mForm);
 | 
						|
    form->MaybeSubmit(nullptr);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::UpdateCheckedState(bool aNotify) {
 | 
						|
  SetStates(ElementState::CHECKED, IsRadioOrCheckbox() && mChecked, aNotify);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::UpdateIndeterminateState(bool aNotify) {
 | 
						|
  bool indeterminate = [&] {
 | 
						|
    if (mType == FormControlType::InputCheckbox) {
 | 
						|
      return mIndeterminate;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    if (mType == FormControlType::InputRadio) {
 | 
						|
      return !mChecked && !GetSelectedRadioButton();
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
  }();
 | 
						|
  SetStates(ElementState::INDETERMINATE, indeterminate, aNotify);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::SetCheckedInternal(bool aChecked, bool aNotify) {
 | 
						|
  // Set the value
 | 
						|
  mChecked = aChecked;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (IsRadioOrCheckbox()) {
 | 
						|
    SetStates(ElementState::CHECKED, aChecked, aNotify);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // No need to update element state, since we're about to call
 | 
						|
  // UpdateState anyway.
 | 
						|
  UpdateAllValidityStatesButNotElementState();
 | 
						|
  UpdateIndeterminateState(aNotify);
 | 
						|
  UpdateValidityElementStates(aNotify);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Notify all radios in the group that value has changed, this is to let
 | 
						|
  // radios to have the chance to update its states, e.g., :indeterminate.
 | 
						|
  if (mType == FormControlType::InputRadio) {
 | 
						|
    nsCOMPtr<nsIRadioVisitor> visitor = new nsRadioUpdateStateVisitor(this);
 | 
						|
    VisitGroup(visitor);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
#if !defined(ANDROID) && !defined(XP_MACOSX)
 | 
						|
bool HTMLInputElement::IsNodeApzAwareInternal() const {
 | 
						|
  // Tell APZC we may handle mouse wheel event and do preventDefault when input
 | 
						|
  // type is number.
 | 
						|
  return mType == FormControlType::InputNumber ||
 | 
						|
         mType == FormControlType::InputRange ||
 | 
						|
         nsINode::IsNodeApzAwareInternal();
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
#endif
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
bool HTMLInputElement::IsInteractiveHTMLContent() const {
 | 
						|
  return mType != FormControlType::InputHidden ||
 | 
						|
         nsGenericHTMLFormControlElementWithState::IsInteractiveHTMLContent();
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::AsyncEventRunning(AsyncEventDispatcher* aEvent) {
 | 
						|
  nsImageLoadingContent::AsyncEventRunning(aEvent);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::Select() {
 | 
						|
  if (!IsSingleLineTextControl(false)) {
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  TextControlState* state = GetEditorState();
 | 
						|
  MOZ_ASSERT(state, "Single line text controls are expected to have a state");
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (FocusState() != FocusTristate::eUnfocusable) {
 | 
						|
    RefPtr<nsFrameSelection> fs = state->GetConstFrameSelection();
 | 
						|
    if (fs && fs->MouseDownRecorded()) {
 | 
						|
      // This means that we're being called while the frame selection has a
 | 
						|
      // mouse down event recorded to adjust the caret during the mouse up
 | 
						|
      // event. We are probably called from the focus event handler.  We should
 | 
						|
      // override the delayed caret data in this case to ensure that this
 | 
						|
      // select() call takes effect.
 | 
						|
      fs->SetDelayedCaretData(nullptr);
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    if (RefPtr<nsFocusManager> fm = nsFocusManager::GetFocusManager()) {
 | 
						|
      fm->SetFocus(this, nsIFocusManager::FLAG_NOSCROLL);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      // A focus event handler may change the type attribute, which will destroy
 | 
						|
      // the previous state object.
 | 
						|
      state = GetEditorState();
 | 
						|
      if (!state) {
 | 
						|
        return;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Directly call TextControlState::SetSelectionRange because
 | 
						|
  // HTMLInputElement::SetSelectionRange only applies to fewer types
 | 
						|
  state->SetSelectionRange(0, UINT32_MAX, Optional<nsAString>(), IgnoreErrors(),
 | 
						|
                           TextControlState::ScrollAfterSelection::No);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::SelectAll(nsPresContext* aPresContext) {
 | 
						|
  nsIFormControlFrame* formControlFrame = GetFormControlFrame(true);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (formControlFrame) {
 | 
						|
    formControlFrame->SetFormProperty(nsGkAtoms::select, u""_ns);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
bool HTMLInputElement::NeedToInitializeEditorForEvent(
 | 
						|
    EventChainPreVisitor& aVisitor) const {
 | 
						|
  // We only need to initialize the editor for single line input controls
 | 
						|
  // because they are lazily initialized.  We don't need to initialize the
 | 
						|
  // control for certain types of events, because we know that those events are
 | 
						|
  // safe to be handled without the editor being initialized.  These events
 | 
						|
  // include: mousein/move/out, overflow/underflow, DOM mutation, and void
 | 
						|
  // events. Void events are dispatched frequently by async keyboard scrolling
 | 
						|
  // to focused elements, so it's important to handle them to prevent excessive
 | 
						|
  // DOM mutations.
 | 
						|
  if (!IsSingleLineTextControl(false) ||
 | 
						|
      aVisitor.mEvent->mClass == eMutationEventClass) {
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  switch (aVisitor.mEvent->mMessage) {
 | 
						|
    case eVoidEvent:
 | 
						|
    case eMouseMove:
 | 
						|
    case eMouseEnterIntoWidget:
 | 
						|
    case eMouseExitFromWidget:
 | 
						|
    case eMouseOver:
 | 
						|
    case eMouseOut:
 | 
						|
    case eScrollPortUnderflow:
 | 
						|
    case eScrollPortOverflow:
 | 
						|
      return false;
 | 
						|
    default:
 | 
						|
      return true;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
bool HTMLInputElement::IsDisabledForEvents(WidgetEvent* aEvent) {
 | 
						|
  return IsElementDisabledForEvents(aEvent, GetPrimaryFrame());
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
bool HTMLInputElement::CheckActivationBehaviorPreconditions(
 | 
						|
    EventChainVisitor& aVisitor) const {
 | 
						|
  switch (mType) {
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputColor:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputCheckbox:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputRadio:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputFile:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputSubmit:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputImage:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputReset:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputButton: {
 | 
						|
      // Track whether we're in the outermost Dispatch invocation that will
 | 
						|
      // cause activation of the input.  That is, if we're a click event, or a
 | 
						|
      // DOMActivate that was dispatched directly, this will be set, but if
 | 
						|
      // we're a DOMActivate dispatched from click handling, it will not be set.
 | 
						|
      WidgetMouseEvent* mouseEvent = aVisitor.mEvent->AsMouseEvent();
 | 
						|
      bool outerActivateEvent =
 | 
						|
          (mouseEvent && mouseEvent->IsLeftClickEvent()) ||
 | 
						|
          (aVisitor.mEvent->mMessage == eLegacyDOMActivate &&
 | 
						|
           !mInInternalActivate);
 | 
						|
      if (outerActivateEvent) {
 | 
						|
        aVisitor.mItemFlags |= NS_OUTER_ACTIVATE_EVENT;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      return outerActivateEvent;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    default:
 | 
						|
      return false;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::GetEventTargetParent(EventChainPreVisitor& aVisitor) {
 | 
						|
  // Do not process any DOM events if the element is disabled
 | 
						|
  aVisitor.mCanHandle = false;
 | 
						|
  if (IsDisabledForEvents(aVisitor.mEvent)) {
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Initialize the editor if needed.
 | 
						|
  if (NeedToInitializeEditorForEvent(aVisitor)) {
 | 
						|
    nsITextControlFrame* textControlFrame = do_QueryFrame(GetPrimaryFrame());
 | 
						|
    if (textControlFrame) textControlFrame->EnsureEditorInitialized();
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (CheckActivationBehaviorPreconditions(aVisitor)) {
 | 
						|
    aVisitor.mWantsActivationBehavior = true;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // We must cache type because mType may change during JS event (bug 2369)
 | 
						|
  aVisitor.mItemFlags |= uint8_t(mType);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (aVisitor.mEvent->mMessage == eFocus && aVisitor.mEvent->IsTrusted() &&
 | 
						|
      MayFireChangeOnBlur() &&
 | 
						|
      // StartRangeThumbDrag already set mFocusedValue on 'mousedown' before
 | 
						|
      // we get the 'focus' event.
 | 
						|
      !mIsDraggingRange) {
 | 
						|
    GetValue(mFocusedValue, CallerType::System);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Fire onchange (if necessary), before we do the blur, bug 357684.
 | 
						|
  if (aVisitor.mEvent->mMessage == eBlur) {
 | 
						|
    // We set NS_PRE_HANDLE_BLUR_EVENT here and handle it in PreHandleEvent to
 | 
						|
    // prevent breaking event target chain creation.
 | 
						|
    aVisitor.mWantsPreHandleEvent = true;
 | 
						|
    aVisitor.mItemFlags |= NS_PRE_HANDLE_BLUR_EVENT;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (mType == FormControlType::InputRange &&
 | 
						|
      (aVisitor.mEvent->mMessage == eFocus ||
 | 
						|
       aVisitor.mEvent->mMessage == eBlur)) {
 | 
						|
    // Just as nsGenericHTMLFormControlElementWithState::GetEventTargetParent
 | 
						|
    // calls nsIFormControlFrame::SetFocus, we handle focus here.
 | 
						|
    nsIFrame* frame = GetPrimaryFrame();
 | 
						|
    if (frame) {
 | 
						|
      frame->InvalidateFrameSubtree();
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (mType == FormControlType::InputNumber && aVisitor.mEvent->IsTrusted()) {
 | 
						|
    if (mNumberControlSpinnerIsSpinning) {
 | 
						|
      // If the timer is running the user has depressed the mouse on one of the
 | 
						|
      // spin buttons. If the mouse exits the button we either want to reverse
 | 
						|
      // the direction of spin if it has moved over the other button, or else
 | 
						|
      // we want to end the spin. We do this here (rather than in
 | 
						|
      // PostHandleEvent) because we don't want to let content preventDefault()
 | 
						|
      // the end of the spin.
 | 
						|
      if (aVisitor.mEvent->mMessage == eMouseMove) {
 | 
						|
        // Be aggressive about stopping the spin:
 | 
						|
        bool stopSpin = true;
 | 
						|
        nsNumberControlFrame* numberControlFrame =
 | 
						|
            do_QueryFrame(GetPrimaryFrame());
 | 
						|
        if (numberControlFrame) {
 | 
						|
          bool oldNumberControlSpinTimerSpinsUpValue =
 | 
						|
              mNumberControlSpinnerSpinsUp;
 | 
						|
          switch (numberControlFrame->GetSpinButtonForPointerEvent(
 | 
						|
              aVisitor.mEvent->AsMouseEvent())) {
 | 
						|
            case nsNumberControlFrame::eSpinButtonUp:
 | 
						|
              mNumberControlSpinnerSpinsUp = true;
 | 
						|
              stopSpin = false;
 | 
						|
              break;
 | 
						|
            case nsNumberControlFrame::eSpinButtonDown:
 | 
						|
              mNumberControlSpinnerSpinsUp = false;
 | 
						|
              stopSpin = false;
 | 
						|
              break;
 | 
						|
          }
 | 
						|
          if (mNumberControlSpinnerSpinsUp !=
 | 
						|
              oldNumberControlSpinTimerSpinsUpValue) {
 | 
						|
            nsNumberControlFrame* numberControlFrame =
 | 
						|
                do_QueryFrame(GetPrimaryFrame());
 | 
						|
            if (numberControlFrame) {
 | 
						|
              numberControlFrame->SpinnerStateChanged();
 | 
						|
            }
 | 
						|
          }
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
        if (stopSpin) {
 | 
						|
          StopNumberControlSpinnerSpin();
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
      } else if (aVisitor.mEvent->mMessage == eMouseUp) {
 | 
						|
        StopNumberControlSpinnerSpin();
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  nsGenericHTMLFormControlElementWithState::GetEventTargetParent(aVisitor);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Stop the event if the related target's first non-native ancestor is the
 | 
						|
  // same as the original target's first non-native ancestor (we are moving
 | 
						|
  // inside of the same element).
 | 
						|
  //
 | 
						|
  // FIXME(emilio): Is this still needed now that we use Shadow DOM for this?
 | 
						|
  if (CreatesDateTimeWidget() && aVisitor.mEvent->IsTrusted() &&
 | 
						|
      (aVisitor.mEvent->mMessage == eFocus ||
 | 
						|
       aVisitor.mEvent->mMessage == eFocusIn ||
 | 
						|
       aVisitor.mEvent->mMessage == eFocusOut ||
 | 
						|
       aVisitor.mEvent->mMessage == eBlur)) {
 | 
						|
    nsIContent* originalTarget = nsIContent::FromEventTargetOrNull(
 | 
						|
        aVisitor.mEvent->AsFocusEvent()->mOriginalTarget);
 | 
						|
    nsIContent* relatedTarget = nsIContent::FromEventTargetOrNull(
 | 
						|
        aVisitor.mEvent->AsFocusEvent()->mRelatedTarget);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    if (originalTarget && relatedTarget &&
 | 
						|
        originalTarget->FindFirstNonChromeOnlyAccessContent() ==
 | 
						|
            relatedTarget->FindFirstNonChromeOnlyAccessContent()) {
 | 
						|
      aVisitor.mCanHandle = false;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::LegacyPreActivationBehavior(
 | 
						|
    EventChainVisitor& aVisitor) {
 | 
						|
  //
 | 
						|
  // Web pages expect the value of a radio button or checkbox to be set
 | 
						|
  // *before* onclick and DOMActivate fire, and they expect that if they set
 | 
						|
  // the value explicitly during onclick or DOMActivate it will not be toggled
 | 
						|
  // or any such nonsense.
 | 
						|
  // In order to support that (bug 57137 and 58460 are examples) we toggle
 | 
						|
  // the checked attribute *first*, and then fire onclick.  If the user
 | 
						|
  // returns false, we reset the control to the old checked value.  Otherwise,
 | 
						|
  // we dispatch DOMActivate.  If DOMActivate is cancelled, we also reset
 | 
						|
  // the control to the old checked value.  We need to keep track of whether
 | 
						|
  // we've already toggled the state from onclick since the user could
 | 
						|
  // explicitly dispatch DOMActivate on the element.
 | 
						|
  //
 | 
						|
  // These are compatibility hacks and are defined as legacy-pre-activation
 | 
						|
  // and legacy-canceled-activation behavior in HTML.
 | 
						|
  //
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Assert mType didn't change after GetEventTargetParent
 | 
						|
  MOZ_ASSERT(NS_CONTROL_TYPE(aVisitor.mItemFlags) == uint8_t(mType));
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  bool originalCheckedValue = false;
 | 
						|
  mCheckedIsToggled = false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (mType == FormControlType::InputCheckbox) {
 | 
						|
    if (mIndeterminate) {
 | 
						|
      // indeterminate is always set to FALSE when the checkbox is toggled
 | 
						|
      SetIndeterminateInternal(false, false);
 | 
						|
      aVisitor.mItemFlags |= NS_ORIGINAL_INDETERMINATE_VALUE;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    originalCheckedValue = Checked();
 | 
						|
    DoSetChecked(!originalCheckedValue, true, true);
 | 
						|
    mCheckedIsToggled = true;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    if (aVisitor.mEventStatus != nsEventStatus_eConsumeNoDefault) {
 | 
						|
      aVisitor.mEventStatus = nsEventStatus_eConsumeDoDefault;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  } else if (mType == FormControlType::InputRadio) {
 | 
						|
    HTMLInputElement* selectedRadioButton = GetSelectedRadioButton();
 | 
						|
    aVisitor.mItemData = static_cast<Element*>(selectedRadioButton);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    originalCheckedValue = Checked();
 | 
						|
    if (!originalCheckedValue) {
 | 
						|
      DoSetChecked(true, true, true);
 | 
						|
      mCheckedIsToggled = true;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    if (aVisitor.mEventStatus != nsEventStatus_eConsumeNoDefault) {
 | 
						|
      aVisitor.mEventStatus = nsEventStatus_eConsumeDoDefault;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (originalCheckedValue) {
 | 
						|
    aVisitor.mItemFlags |= NS_ORIGINAL_CHECKED_VALUE;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // out-of-spec legacy pre-activation behavior needed because of bug 1803805
 | 
						|
  if ((mType == FormControlType::InputSubmit ||
 | 
						|
       mType == FormControlType::InputImage) &&
 | 
						|
      mForm) {
 | 
						|
    aVisitor.mItemFlags |= NS_IN_SUBMIT_CLICK;
 | 
						|
    aVisitor.mItemData = static_cast<Element*>(mForm);
 | 
						|
    // tell the form that we are about to enter a click handler.
 | 
						|
    // that means that if there are scripted submissions, the
 | 
						|
    // latest one will be deferred until after the exit point of the
 | 
						|
    // handler.
 | 
						|
    mForm->OnSubmitClickBegin(this);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
nsresult HTMLInputElement::PreHandleEvent(EventChainVisitor& aVisitor) {
 | 
						|
  if (aVisitor.mItemFlags & NS_PRE_HANDLE_BLUR_EVENT) {
 | 
						|
    MOZ_ASSERT(aVisitor.mEvent->mMessage == eBlur);
 | 
						|
    FireChangeEventIfNeeded();
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return nsGenericHTMLFormControlElementWithState::PreHandleEvent(aVisitor);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::StartRangeThumbDrag(WidgetGUIEvent* aEvent) {
 | 
						|
  nsRangeFrame* rangeFrame = do_QueryFrame(GetPrimaryFrame());
 | 
						|
  if (!rangeFrame) {
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  mIsDraggingRange = true;
 | 
						|
  mRangeThumbDragStartValue = GetValueAsDecimal();
 | 
						|
  // Don't use CaptureFlags::RetargetToElement, as that breaks pseudo-class
 | 
						|
  // styling of the thumb.
 | 
						|
  PresShell::SetCapturingContent(this, CaptureFlags::IgnoreAllowedState);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Before we change the value, record the current value so that we'll
 | 
						|
  // correctly send a 'change' event if appropriate. We need to do this here
 | 
						|
  // because the 'focus' event is handled after the 'mousedown' event that
 | 
						|
  // we're being called for (i.e. too late to update mFocusedValue, since we'll
 | 
						|
  // have changed it by then).
 | 
						|
  GetValue(mFocusedValue, CallerType::System);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  SetValueOfRangeForUserEvent(rangeFrame->GetValueAtEventPoint(aEvent),
 | 
						|
                              SnapToTickMarks::Yes);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::FinishRangeThumbDrag(WidgetGUIEvent* aEvent) {
 | 
						|
  MOZ_ASSERT(mIsDraggingRange);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (PresShell::GetCapturingContent() == this) {
 | 
						|
    PresShell::ReleaseCapturingContent();
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  if (aEvent) {
 | 
						|
    nsRangeFrame* rangeFrame = do_QueryFrame(GetPrimaryFrame());
 | 
						|
    SetValueOfRangeForUserEvent(rangeFrame->GetValueAtEventPoint(aEvent),
 | 
						|
                                SnapToTickMarks::Yes);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  mIsDraggingRange = false;
 | 
						|
  FireChangeEventIfNeeded();
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::CancelRangeThumbDrag(bool aIsForUserEvent) {
 | 
						|
  MOZ_ASSERT(mIsDraggingRange);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  mIsDraggingRange = false;
 | 
						|
  if (PresShell::GetCapturingContent() == this) {
 | 
						|
    PresShell::ReleaseCapturingContent();
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  if (aIsForUserEvent) {
 | 
						|
    SetValueOfRangeForUserEvent(mRangeThumbDragStartValue,
 | 
						|
                                SnapToTickMarks::Yes);
 | 
						|
  } else {
 | 
						|
    // Don't dispatch an 'input' event - at least not using
 | 
						|
    // DispatchTrustedEvent.
 | 
						|
    // TODO: decide what we should do here - bug 851782.
 | 
						|
    nsAutoString val;
 | 
						|
    mInputType->ConvertNumberToString(mRangeThumbDragStartValue, val);
 | 
						|
    // TODO: What should we do if SetValueInternal fails?  (The allocation
 | 
						|
    // is small, so we should be fine here.)
 | 
						|
    SetValueInternal(val, {ValueSetterOption::BySetUserInputAPI,
 | 
						|
                           ValueSetterOption::SetValueChanged});
 | 
						|
    if (nsRangeFrame* frame = do_QueryFrame(GetPrimaryFrame())) {
 | 
						|
      frame->UpdateForValueChange();
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    DebugOnly<nsresult> rvIgnored = nsContentUtils::DispatchInputEvent(this);
 | 
						|
    NS_WARNING_ASSERTION(NS_SUCCEEDED(rvIgnored),
 | 
						|
                         "Failed to dispatch input event");
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::SetValueOfRangeForUserEvent(
 | 
						|
    Decimal aValue, SnapToTickMarks aSnapToTickMarks) {
 | 
						|
  MOZ_ASSERT(aValue.isFinite());
 | 
						|
  if (aSnapToTickMarks == SnapToTickMarks::Yes) {
 | 
						|
    MaybeSnapToTickMark(aValue);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  Decimal oldValue = GetValueAsDecimal();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  nsAutoString val;
 | 
						|
  mInputType->ConvertNumberToString(aValue, val);
 | 
						|
  // TODO: What should we do if SetValueInternal fails?  (The allocation
 | 
						|
  // is small, so we should be fine here.)
 | 
						|
  SetValueInternal(val, {ValueSetterOption::BySetUserInputAPI,
 | 
						|
                         ValueSetterOption::SetValueChanged});
 | 
						|
  if (nsRangeFrame* frame = do_QueryFrame(GetPrimaryFrame())) {
 | 
						|
    frame->UpdateForValueChange();
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (GetValueAsDecimal() != oldValue) {
 | 
						|
    DebugOnly<nsresult> rvIgnored = nsContentUtils::DispatchInputEvent(this);
 | 
						|
    NS_WARNING_ASSERTION(NS_SUCCEEDED(rvIgnored),
 | 
						|
                         "Failed to dispatch input event");
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::StartNumberControlSpinnerSpin() {
 | 
						|
  MOZ_ASSERT(!mNumberControlSpinnerIsSpinning);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  mNumberControlSpinnerIsSpinning = true;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  nsRepeatService::GetInstance()->Start(
 | 
						|
      HandleNumberControlSpin, this, OwnerDoc(), "HandleNumberControlSpin"_ns);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Capture the mouse so that we can tell if the pointer moves from one
 | 
						|
  // spin button to the other, or to some other element:
 | 
						|
  PresShell::SetCapturingContent(this, CaptureFlags::IgnoreAllowedState);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  nsNumberControlFrame* numberControlFrame = do_QueryFrame(GetPrimaryFrame());
 | 
						|
  if (numberControlFrame) {
 | 
						|
    numberControlFrame->SpinnerStateChanged();
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::StopNumberControlSpinnerSpin(SpinnerStopState aState) {
 | 
						|
  if (mNumberControlSpinnerIsSpinning) {
 | 
						|
    if (PresShell::GetCapturingContent() == this) {
 | 
						|
      PresShell::ReleaseCapturingContent();
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    nsRepeatService::GetInstance()->Stop(HandleNumberControlSpin, this);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    mNumberControlSpinnerIsSpinning = false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    if (aState == eAllowDispatchingEvents) {
 | 
						|
      FireChangeEventIfNeeded();
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    nsNumberControlFrame* numberControlFrame = do_QueryFrame(GetPrimaryFrame());
 | 
						|
    if (numberControlFrame) {
 | 
						|
      MOZ_ASSERT(aState == eAllowDispatchingEvents,
 | 
						|
                 "Shouldn't have primary frame for the element when we're not "
 | 
						|
                 "allowed to dispatch events to it anymore.");
 | 
						|
      numberControlFrame->SpinnerStateChanged();
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::StepNumberControlForUserEvent(int32_t aDirection) {
 | 
						|
  // We can't use GetValidityState here because the validity state is not set
 | 
						|
  // if the user hasn't previously taken an action to set or change the value,
 | 
						|
  // according to the specs.
 | 
						|
  if (HasBadInput()) {
 | 
						|
    // If the user has typed a value into the control and inadvertently made a
 | 
						|
    // mistake (e.g. put a thousand separator at the wrong point) we do not
 | 
						|
    // want to wipe out what they typed if they try to increment/decrement the
 | 
						|
    // value. Better is to highlight the value as being invalid so that they
 | 
						|
    // can correct what they typed.
 | 
						|
    // We only do this if there actually is a value typed in by/displayed to
 | 
						|
    // the user. (IsValid() can return false if the 'required' attribute is
 | 
						|
    // set and the value is the empty string.)
 | 
						|
    if (!IsValueEmpty()) {
 | 
						|
      // We pass 'true' for SetUserInteracted because we need the UI to update
 | 
						|
      // _now_ or the user will wonder why the step behavior isn't functioning.
 | 
						|
      SetUserInteracted(true);
 | 
						|
      return;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  Decimal newValue = GetValueIfStepped(aDirection, StepCallerType::ForUserEvent,
 | 
						|
                                       IgnoreErrors());
 | 
						|
  if (!newValue.isFinite()) {
 | 
						|
    return;  // value should not or will not change
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  nsAutoString newVal;
 | 
						|
  mInputType->ConvertNumberToString(newValue, newVal);
 | 
						|
  // TODO: What should we do if SetValueInternal fails?  (The allocation
 | 
						|
  // is small, so we should be fine here.)
 | 
						|
  SetValueInternal(newVal, {ValueSetterOption::BySetUserInputAPI,
 | 
						|
                            ValueSetterOption::SetValueChanged});
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
static bool SelectTextFieldOnFocus() {
 | 
						|
  if (!gSelectTextFieldOnFocus) {
 | 
						|
    int32_t selectTextfieldsOnKeyFocus = -1;
 | 
						|
    nsresult rv =
 | 
						|
        LookAndFeel::GetInt(LookAndFeel::IntID::SelectTextfieldsOnKeyFocus,
 | 
						|
                            &selectTextfieldsOnKeyFocus);
 | 
						|
    if (NS_FAILED(rv)) {
 | 
						|
      gSelectTextFieldOnFocus = -1;
 | 
						|
    } else {
 | 
						|
      gSelectTextFieldOnFocus = selectTextfieldsOnKeyFocus != 0 ? 1 : -1;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return gSelectTextFieldOnFocus == 1;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
bool HTMLInputElement::ShouldPreventDOMActivateDispatch(
 | 
						|
    EventTarget* aOriginalTarget) {
 | 
						|
  /*
 | 
						|
   * For the moment, there is only one situation where we actually want to
 | 
						|
   * prevent firing a DOMActivate event:
 | 
						|
   *  - we are a <input type='file'> that just got a click event,
 | 
						|
   *  - the event was targeted to our button which should have sent a
 | 
						|
   *    DOMActivate event.
 | 
						|
   */
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (mType != FormControlType::InputFile) {
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  Element* target = Element::FromEventTargetOrNull(aOriginalTarget);
 | 
						|
  if (!target) {
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return target->GetParent() == this &&
 | 
						|
         target->IsRootOfNativeAnonymousSubtree() &&
 | 
						|
         target->IsHTMLElement(nsGkAtoms::button);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
nsresult HTMLInputElement::MaybeInitPickers(EventChainPostVisitor& aVisitor) {
 | 
						|
  // Open a file picker when we receive a click on a <input type='file'>, or
 | 
						|
  // open a color picker when we receive a click on a <input type='color'>.
 | 
						|
  // A click is handled if it's the left mouse button.
 | 
						|
  // We do not prevent non-trusted click because authors can already use
 | 
						|
  // .click(). However, the pickers will check and consume user activation.
 | 
						|
  WidgetMouseEvent* mouseEvent = aVisitor.mEvent->AsMouseEvent();
 | 
						|
  if (!(mouseEvent && mouseEvent->IsLeftClickEvent())) {
 | 
						|
    return NS_OK;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  if (mType == FormControlType::InputFile) {
 | 
						|
    // If the user clicked on the "Choose folder..." button we open the
 | 
						|
    // directory picker, else we open the file picker.
 | 
						|
    FilePickerType type = FILE_PICKER_FILE;
 | 
						|
    nsIContent* target =
 | 
						|
        nsIContent::FromEventTargetOrNull(aVisitor.mEvent->mOriginalTarget);
 | 
						|
    if (target && target->FindFirstNonChromeOnlyAccessContent() == this &&
 | 
						|
        StaticPrefs::dom_webkitBlink_dirPicker_enabled() &&
 | 
						|
        HasAttr(nsGkAtoms::webkitdirectory)) {
 | 
						|
      type = FILE_PICKER_DIRECTORY;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    return InitFilePicker(type);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  if (mType == FormControlType::InputColor) {
 | 
						|
    return InitColorPicker();
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return NS_OK;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/**
 | 
						|
 * Return true if the input event should be ignored because of its modifiers.
 | 
						|
 * Control is treated specially, since sometimes we ignore it, and sometimes
 | 
						|
 * we don't (for webcompat reasons).
 | 
						|
 */
 | 
						|
static bool IgnoreInputEventWithModifier(const WidgetInputEvent& aEvent,
 | 
						|
                                         bool ignoreControl) {
 | 
						|
  return (ignoreControl && aEvent.IsControl()) ||
 | 
						|
         aEvent.IsAltGraph()
 | 
						|
#if defined(XP_WIN) || defined(MOZ_WIDGET_GTK)
 | 
						|
         // Meta key is the Windows Logo key on Windows and Linux which may
 | 
						|
         // assign some special meaning for the events while it's pressed.
 | 
						|
         // On the other hand, it's a normal modifier in macOS and Android.
 | 
						|
         // Therefore, We should ignore it only in Win/Linux.
 | 
						|
         || aEvent.IsMeta()
 | 
						|
#endif
 | 
						|
         || aEvent.IsFn();
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
bool HTMLInputElement::StepsInputValue(
 | 
						|
    const WidgetKeyboardEvent& aEvent) const {
 | 
						|
  if (mType != FormControlType::InputNumber) {
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  if (aEvent.mMessage != eKeyPress) {
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  if (!aEvent.IsTrusted()) {
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  if (aEvent.mKeyCode != NS_VK_UP && aEvent.mKeyCode != NS_VK_DOWN) {
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  if (IgnoreInputEventWithModifier(aEvent, false)) {
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  if (aEvent.DefaultPrevented()) {
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  if (!IsMutable()) {
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return true;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
static bool ActivatesWithKeyboard(FormControlType aType, uint32_t aKeyCode) {
 | 
						|
  switch (aType) {
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputCheckbox:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputRadio:
 | 
						|
      // Checkbox and Radio try to submit on Enter press
 | 
						|
      return aKeyCode != NS_VK_RETURN;
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputButton:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputReset:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputSubmit:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputFile:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputImage:  // Bug 34418
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputColor:
 | 
						|
      return true;
 | 
						|
    default:
 | 
						|
      return false;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
nsresult HTMLInputElement::PostHandleEvent(EventChainPostVisitor& aVisitor) {
 | 
						|
  if (aVisitor.mEvent->mMessage == eBlur) {
 | 
						|
    if (mIsDraggingRange) {
 | 
						|
      FinishRangeThumbDrag();
 | 
						|
    } else if (mNumberControlSpinnerIsSpinning) {
 | 
						|
      StopNumberControlSpinnerSpin();
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  nsresult rv = NS_OK;
 | 
						|
  auto oldType = FormControlType(NS_CONTROL_TYPE(aVisitor.mItemFlags));
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Ideally we would make the default action for click and space just dispatch
 | 
						|
  // DOMActivate, and the default action for DOMActivate flip the checkbox/
 | 
						|
  // radio state and fire onchange.  However, for backwards compatibility, we
 | 
						|
  // need to flip the state before firing click, and we need to fire click
 | 
						|
  // when space is pressed.  So, we just nest the firing of DOMActivate inside
 | 
						|
  // the click event handling, and allow cancellation of DOMActivate to cancel
 | 
						|
  // the click.
 | 
						|
  if (aVisitor.mEventStatus != nsEventStatus_eConsumeNoDefault &&
 | 
						|
      !IsSingleLineTextControl(true) && mType != FormControlType::InputNumber) {
 | 
						|
    WidgetMouseEvent* mouseEvent = aVisitor.mEvent->AsMouseEvent();
 | 
						|
    if (mouseEvent && mouseEvent->IsLeftClickEvent() &&
 | 
						|
        OwnerDoc()->MayHaveDOMActivateListeners() &&
 | 
						|
        !ShouldPreventDOMActivateDispatch(aVisitor.mEvent->mOriginalTarget)) {
 | 
						|
      // DOMActive event should be trusted since the activation is actually
 | 
						|
      // occurred even if the cause is an untrusted click event.
 | 
						|
      InternalUIEvent actEvent(true, eLegacyDOMActivate, mouseEvent);
 | 
						|
      actEvent.mDetail = 1;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      if (RefPtr<PresShell> presShell =
 | 
						|
              aVisitor.mPresContext ? aVisitor.mPresContext->GetPresShell()
 | 
						|
                                    : nullptr) {
 | 
						|
        nsEventStatus status = nsEventStatus_eIgnore;
 | 
						|
        mInInternalActivate = true;
 | 
						|
        rv = presShell->HandleDOMEventWithTarget(this, &actEvent, &status);
 | 
						|
        mInInternalActivate = false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        // If activate is cancelled, we must do the same as when click is
 | 
						|
        // cancelled (revert the checkbox to its original value).
 | 
						|
        if (status == nsEventStatus_eConsumeNoDefault) {
 | 
						|
          aVisitor.mEventStatus = status;
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  bool preventDefault =
 | 
						|
      aVisitor.mEventStatus == nsEventStatus_eConsumeNoDefault;
 | 
						|
  if (IsDisabled() && oldType != FormControlType::InputCheckbox &&
 | 
						|
      oldType != FormControlType::InputRadio) {
 | 
						|
    // Behave as if defaultPrevented when the element becomes disabled by event
 | 
						|
    // listeners. Checkboxes and radio buttons should still process clicks for
 | 
						|
    // web compat. See:
 | 
						|
    // https://html.spec.whatwg.org/multipage/input.html#the-input-element:activation-behaviour
 | 
						|
    preventDefault = true;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (NS_SUCCEEDED(rv)) {
 | 
						|
    WidgetKeyboardEvent* keyEvent = aVisitor.mEvent->AsKeyboardEvent();
 | 
						|
    if (keyEvent && StepsInputValue(*keyEvent)) {
 | 
						|
      StepNumberControlForUserEvent(keyEvent->mKeyCode == NS_VK_UP ? 1 : -1);
 | 
						|
      FireChangeEventIfNeeded();
 | 
						|
      aVisitor.mEventStatus = nsEventStatus_eConsumeNoDefault;
 | 
						|
    } else if (!preventDefault) {
 | 
						|
      if (keyEvent && ActivatesWithKeyboard(mType, keyEvent->mKeyCode) &&
 | 
						|
          keyEvent->IsTrusted()) {
 | 
						|
        // We maybe dispatch a synthesized click for keyboard activation.
 | 
						|
        HandleKeyboardActivation(aVisitor);
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      switch (aVisitor.mEvent->mMessage) {
 | 
						|
        case eFocus: {
 | 
						|
          // see if we should select the contents of the textbox. This happens
 | 
						|
          // for text and password fields when the field was focused by the
 | 
						|
          // keyboard or a navigation, the platform allows it, and it wasn't
 | 
						|
          // just because we raised a window.
 | 
						|
          //
 | 
						|
          // While it'd usually make sense, we don't do this for JS callers
 | 
						|
          // because it causes some compat issues, see bug 1712724 for example.
 | 
						|
          nsFocusManager* fm = nsFocusManager::GetFocusManager();
 | 
						|
          if (fm && IsSingleLineTextControl(false) &&
 | 
						|
              !aVisitor.mEvent->AsFocusEvent()->mFromRaise &&
 | 
						|
              SelectTextFieldOnFocus()) {
 | 
						|
            if (Document* document = GetComposedDoc()) {
 | 
						|
              uint32_t lastFocusMethod =
 | 
						|
                  fm->GetLastFocusMethod(document->GetWindow());
 | 
						|
              const bool shouldSelectAllOnFocus = [&] {
 | 
						|
                if (lastFocusMethod & nsIFocusManager::FLAG_BYMOVEFOCUS) {
 | 
						|
                  return true;
 | 
						|
                }
 | 
						|
                if (lastFocusMethod & nsIFocusManager::FLAG_BYJS) {
 | 
						|
                  return false;
 | 
						|
                }
 | 
						|
                return bool(lastFocusMethod & nsIFocusManager::FLAG_BYKEY);
 | 
						|
              }();
 | 
						|
              if (shouldSelectAllOnFocus) {
 | 
						|
                RefPtr<nsPresContext> presContext =
 | 
						|
                    GetPresContext(eForComposedDoc);
 | 
						|
                SelectAll(presContext);
 | 
						|
              }
 | 
						|
            }
 | 
						|
          }
 | 
						|
          break;
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        case eKeyDown: {
 | 
						|
          // For compatibility with the other browsers, we should active this
 | 
						|
          // element at least when a checkbox or a radio button.
 | 
						|
          // TODO: Investigate which elements are activated by space key in the
 | 
						|
          //       other browsers.
 | 
						|
          if (aVisitor.mPresContext && keyEvent->IsTrusted() && !IsDisabled() &&
 | 
						|
              keyEvent->ShouldWorkAsSpaceKey() &&
 | 
						|
              (mType == FormControlType::InputCheckbox ||
 | 
						|
               mType == FormControlType::InputRadio)) {
 | 
						|
            EventStateManager::SetActiveManager(
 | 
						|
                aVisitor.mPresContext->EventStateManager(), this);
 | 
						|
          }
 | 
						|
          break;
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        case eKeyPress: {
 | 
						|
          if (mType == FormControlType::InputRadio && keyEvent->IsTrusted() &&
 | 
						|
              !keyEvent->IsAlt() && !keyEvent->IsControl() &&
 | 
						|
              !keyEvent->IsMeta()) {
 | 
						|
            // Radio button navigation needs to check visibility, so flush
 | 
						|
            // to ensure visibility is up to date.
 | 
						|
            if (Document* doc = GetComposedDoc()) {
 | 
						|
              doc->FlushPendingNotifications(
 | 
						|
                  FlushType::EnsurePresShellInitAndFrames);
 | 
						|
            }
 | 
						|
            rv = MaybeHandleRadioButtonNavigation(aVisitor, keyEvent->mKeyCode);
 | 
						|
          }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          /*
 | 
						|
           * For some input types, if the user hits enter, the form is
 | 
						|
           * submitted.
 | 
						|
           *
 | 
						|
           * Bug 99920, bug 109463 and bug 147850:
 | 
						|
           * (a) if there is a submit control in the form, click the first
 | 
						|
           *     submit control in the form.
 | 
						|
           * (b) if there is just one text control in the form, submit by
 | 
						|
           *     sending a submit event directly to the form
 | 
						|
           * (c) if there is more than one text input and no submit buttons, do
 | 
						|
           *     not submit, period.
 | 
						|
           */
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          if (keyEvent->mKeyCode == NS_VK_RETURN && keyEvent->IsTrusted() &&
 | 
						|
              (IsSingleLineTextControl(false, mType) ||
 | 
						|
               IsDateTimeInputType(mType) ||
 | 
						|
               mType == FormControlType::InputCheckbox ||
 | 
						|
               mType == FormControlType::InputRadio)) {
 | 
						|
            if (IsSingleLineTextControl(false, mType) ||
 | 
						|
                IsDateTimeInputType(mType)) {
 | 
						|
              FireChangeEventIfNeeded();
 | 
						|
            }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
            if (aVisitor.mPresContext) {
 | 
						|
              MaybeSubmitForm(aVisitor.mPresContext);
 | 
						|
            }
 | 
						|
          }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          if (mType == FormControlType::InputRange && keyEvent->IsTrusted() &&
 | 
						|
              !keyEvent->IsAlt() && !keyEvent->IsControl() &&
 | 
						|
              !keyEvent->IsMeta() &&
 | 
						|
              (keyEvent->mKeyCode == NS_VK_LEFT ||
 | 
						|
               keyEvent->mKeyCode == NS_VK_RIGHT ||
 | 
						|
               keyEvent->mKeyCode == NS_VK_UP ||
 | 
						|
               keyEvent->mKeyCode == NS_VK_DOWN ||
 | 
						|
               keyEvent->mKeyCode == NS_VK_PAGE_UP ||
 | 
						|
               keyEvent->mKeyCode == NS_VK_PAGE_DOWN ||
 | 
						|
               keyEvent->mKeyCode == NS_VK_HOME ||
 | 
						|
               keyEvent->mKeyCode == NS_VK_END)) {
 | 
						|
            Decimal minimum = GetMinimum();
 | 
						|
            Decimal maximum = GetMaximum();
 | 
						|
            MOZ_ASSERT(minimum.isFinite() && maximum.isFinite());
 | 
						|
            if (minimum < maximum) {  // else the value is locked to the minimum
 | 
						|
              Decimal value = GetValueAsDecimal();
 | 
						|
              Decimal step = GetStep();
 | 
						|
              if (step == kStepAny) {
 | 
						|
                step = GetDefaultStep();
 | 
						|
              }
 | 
						|
              MOZ_ASSERT(value.isFinite() && step.isFinite());
 | 
						|
              Decimal newValue;
 | 
						|
              switch (keyEvent->mKeyCode) {
 | 
						|
                case NS_VK_LEFT:
 | 
						|
                  newValue = value +
 | 
						|
                             (GetComputedDirectionality() == Directionality::Rtl
 | 
						|
                                  ? step
 | 
						|
                                  : -step);
 | 
						|
                  break;
 | 
						|
                case NS_VK_RIGHT:
 | 
						|
                  newValue = value +
 | 
						|
                             (GetComputedDirectionality() == Directionality::Rtl
 | 
						|
                                  ? -step
 | 
						|
                                  : step);
 | 
						|
                  break;
 | 
						|
                case NS_VK_UP:
 | 
						|
                  // Even for horizontal range, "up" means "increase"
 | 
						|
                  newValue = value + step;
 | 
						|
                  break;
 | 
						|
                case NS_VK_DOWN:
 | 
						|
                  // Even for horizontal range, "down" means "decrease"
 | 
						|
                  newValue = value - step;
 | 
						|
                  break;
 | 
						|
                case NS_VK_HOME:
 | 
						|
                  newValue = minimum;
 | 
						|
                  break;
 | 
						|
                case NS_VK_END:
 | 
						|
                  newValue = maximum;
 | 
						|
                  break;
 | 
						|
                case NS_VK_PAGE_UP:
 | 
						|
                  // For PgUp/PgDn we jump 10% of the total range, unless step
 | 
						|
                  // requires us to jump more.
 | 
						|
                  newValue =
 | 
						|
                      value + std::max(step, (maximum - minimum) / Decimal(10));
 | 
						|
                  break;
 | 
						|
                case NS_VK_PAGE_DOWN:
 | 
						|
                  newValue =
 | 
						|
                      value - std::max(step, (maximum - minimum) / Decimal(10));
 | 
						|
                  break;
 | 
						|
              }
 | 
						|
              SetValueOfRangeForUserEvent(newValue);
 | 
						|
              FireChangeEventIfNeeded();
 | 
						|
              aVisitor.mEventStatus = nsEventStatus_eConsumeNoDefault;
 | 
						|
            }
 | 
						|
          }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        } break;  // eKeyPress
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        case eMouseDown:
 | 
						|
        case eMouseUp:
 | 
						|
        case eMouseDoubleClick: {
 | 
						|
          // cancel all of these events for buttons
 | 
						|
          // XXXsmaug Why?
 | 
						|
          WidgetMouseEvent* mouseEvent = aVisitor.mEvent->AsMouseEvent();
 | 
						|
          if (mouseEvent->mButton == MouseButton::eMiddle ||
 | 
						|
              mouseEvent->mButton == MouseButton::eSecondary) {
 | 
						|
            if (mType == FormControlType::InputButton ||
 | 
						|
                mType == FormControlType::InputReset ||
 | 
						|
                mType == FormControlType::InputSubmit) {
 | 
						|
              if (aVisitor.mDOMEvent) {
 | 
						|
                aVisitor.mDOMEvent->StopPropagation();
 | 
						|
              } else {
 | 
						|
                rv = NS_ERROR_FAILURE;
 | 
						|
              }
 | 
						|
            }
 | 
						|
          }
 | 
						|
          if (mType == FormControlType::InputNumber &&
 | 
						|
              aVisitor.mEvent->IsTrusted()) {
 | 
						|
            if (mouseEvent->mButton == MouseButton::ePrimary &&
 | 
						|
                !IgnoreInputEventWithModifier(*mouseEvent, false)) {
 | 
						|
              nsNumberControlFrame* numberControlFrame =
 | 
						|
                  do_QueryFrame(GetPrimaryFrame());
 | 
						|
              if (numberControlFrame) {
 | 
						|
                if (aVisitor.mEvent->mMessage == eMouseDown && IsMutable()) {
 | 
						|
                  switch (numberControlFrame->GetSpinButtonForPointerEvent(
 | 
						|
                      aVisitor.mEvent->AsMouseEvent())) {
 | 
						|
                    case nsNumberControlFrame::eSpinButtonUp:
 | 
						|
                      StepNumberControlForUserEvent(1);
 | 
						|
                      mNumberControlSpinnerSpinsUp = true;
 | 
						|
                      StartNumberControlSpinnerSpin();
 | 
						|
                      aVisitor.mEventStatus = nsEventStatus_eConsumeNoDefault;
 | 
						|
                      break;
 | 
						|
                    case nsNumberControlFrame::eSpinButtonDown:
 | 
						|
                      StepNumberControlForUserEvent(-1);
 | 
						|
                      mNumberControlSpinnerSpinsUp = false;
 | 
						|
                      StartNumberControlSpinnerSpin();
 | 
						|
                      aVisitor.mEventStatus = nsEventStatus_eConsumeNoDefault;
 | 
						|
                      break;
 | 
						|
                  }
 | 
						|
                }
 | 
						|
              }
 | 
						|
            }
 | 
						|
            if (aVisitor.mEventStatus != nsEventStatus_eConsumeNoDefault) {
 | 
						|
              // We didn't handle this to step up/down. Whatever this was, be
 | 
						|
              // aggressive about stopping the spin. (And don't set
 | 
						|
              // nsEventStatus_eConsumeNoDefault after doing so, since that
 | 
						|
              // might prevent, say, the context menu from opening.)
 | 
						|
              StopNumberControlSpinnerSpin();
 | 
						|
            }
 | 
						|
          }
 | 
						|
          break;
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
#if !defined(ANDROID) && !defined(XP_MACOSX)
 | 
						|
        case eWheel: {
 | 
						|
          // Handle wheel events as increasing / decreasing the input element's
 | 
						|
          // value when it's focused and it's type is number or range.
 | 
						|
          WidgetWheelEvent* wheelEvent = aVisitor.mEvent->AsWheelEvent();
 | 
						|
          if (!aVisitor.mEvent->DefaultPrevented() &&
 | 
						|
              aVisitor.mEvent->IsTrusted() && IsMutable() && wheelEvent &&
 | 
						|
              wheelEvent->mDeltaY != 0 &&
 | 
						|
              wheelEvent->mDeltaMode != WheelEvent_Binding::DOM_DELTA_PIXEL) {
 | 
						|
            if (mType == FormControlType::InputNumber) {
 | 
						|
              if (nsContentUtils::IsFocusedContent(this)) {
 | 
						|
                StepNumberControlForUserEvent(wheelEvent->mDeltaY > 0 ? -1 : 1);
 | 
						|
                FireChangeEventIfNeeded();
 | 
						|
                aVisitor.mEvent->PreventDefault();
 | 
						|
              }
 | 
						|
            } else if (mType == FormControlType::InputRange &&
 | 
						|
                       nsContentUtils::IsFocusedContent(this) &&
 | 
						|
                       GetMinimum() < GetMaximum()) {
 | 
						|
              Decimal value = GetValueAsDecimal();
 | 
						|
              Decimal step = GetStep();
 | 
						|
              if (step == kStepAny) {
 | 
						|
                step = GetDefaultStep();
 | 
						|
              }
 | 
						|
              MOZ_ASSERT(value.isFinite() && step.isFinite());
 | 
						|
              SetValueOfRangeForUserEvent(
 | 
						|
                  wheelEvent->mDeltaY < 0 ? value + step : value - step);
 | 
						|
              FireChangeEventIfNeeded();
 | 
						|
              aVisitor.mEvent->PreventDefault();
 | 
						|
            }
 | 
						|
          }
 | 
						|
          break;
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
#endif
 | 
						|
        case ePointerClick: {
 | 
						|
          if (!aVisitor.mEvent->DefaultPrevented() &&
 | 
						|
              aVisitor.mEvent->IsTrusted() &&
 | 
						|
              aVisitor.mEvent->AsMouseEvent()->mButton ==
 | 
						|
                  MouseButton::ePrimary) {
 | 
						|
            // TODO(emilio): Handling this should ideally not move focus.
 | 
						|
            if (mType == FormControlType::InputSearch) {
 | 
						|
              if (nsSearchControlFrame* searchControlFrame =
 | 
						|
                      do_QueryFrame(GetPrimaryFrame())) {
 | 
						|
                Element* clearButton = searchControlFrame->GetAnonClearButton();
 | 
						|
                if (clearButton &&
 | 
						|
                    aVisitor.mEvent->mOriginalTarget == clearButton) {
 | 
						|
                  SetUserInput(EmptyString(),
 | 
						|
                               *nsContentUtils::GetSystemPrincipal());
 | 
						|
                  // TODO(emilio): This should focus the input, but calling
 | 
						|
                  // SetFocus(this, FLAG_NOSCROLL) for some reason gets us into
 | 
						|
                  // an inconsistent state where we're focused but don't match
 | 
						|
                  // :focus-visible / :focus.
 | 
						|
                }
 | 
						|
              }
 | 
						|
            } else if (mType == FormControlType::InputPassword) {
 | 
						|
              if (nsTextControlFrame* textControlFrame =
 | 
						|
                      do_QueryFrame(GetPrimaryFrame())) {
 | 
						|
                auto* reveal = textControlFrame->GetRevealButton();
 | 
						|
                if (reveal && aVisitor.mEvent->mOriginalTarget == reveal) {
 | 
						|
                  SetRevealPassword(!RevealPassword());
 | 
						|
                  // TODO(emilio): This should focus the input, but calling
 | 
						|
                  // SetFocus(this, FLAG_NOSCROLL) for some reason gets us into
 | 
						|
                  // an inconsistent state where we're focused but don't match
 | 
						|
                  // :focus-visible / :focus.
 | 
						|
                }
 | 
						|
              }
 | 
						|
            }
 | 
						|
          }
 | 
						|
          break;
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
        default:
 | 
						|
          break;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      // Bug 1459231: Temporarily needed till links respect activation target,
 | 
						|
      // then also remove NS_OUTER_ACTIVATE_EVENT. The appropriate
 | 
						|
      // behavior/model for links is still under discussion (see
 | 
						|
      // https://github.com/whatwg/html/issues/1576). For now, we aim for
 | 
						|
      // consistency with other browsers.
 | 
						|
      if (aVisitor.mItemFlags & NS_OUTER_ACTIVATE_EVENT) {
 | 
						|
        switch (mType) {
 | 
						|
          case FormControlType::InputReset:
 | 
						|
          case FormControlType::InputSubmit:
 | 
						|
          case FormControlType::InputImage:
 | 
						|
            if (mForm) {
 | 
						|
              aVisitor.mEvent->mFlags.mMultipleActionsPrevented = true;
 | 
						|
            }
 | 
						|
            break;
 | 
						|
          case FormControlType::InputCheckbox:
 | 
						|
          case FormControlType::InputRadio:
 | 
						|
            aVisitor.mEvent->mFlags.mMultipleActionsPrevented = true;
 | 
						|
            break;
 | 
						|
          default:
 | 
						|
            break;
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }  // if
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (NS_SUCCEEDED(rv) && mType == FormControlType::InputRange) {
 | 
						|
    PostHandleEventForRangeThumb(aVisitor);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (!preventDefault) {
 | 
						|
    MOZ_TRY(MaybeInitPickers(aVisitor));
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return NS_OK;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void EndSubmitClick(EventChainPostVisitor& aVisitor) {
 | 
						|
  auto oldType = FormControlType(NS_CONTROL_TYPE(aVisitor.mItemFlags));
 | 
						|
  if ((aVisitor.mItemFlags & NS_IN_SUBMIT_CLICK) &&
 | 
						|
      (oldType == FormControlType::InputSubmit ||
 | 
						|
       oldType == FormControlType::InputImage)) {
 | 
						|
    nsCOMPtr<nsIContent> content(do_QueryInterface(aVisitor.mItemData));
 | 
						|
    RefPtr<HTMLFormElement> form = HTMLFormElement::FromNodeOrNull(content);
 | 
						|
    // Tell the form that we are about to exit a click handler,
 | 
						|
    // so the form knows not to defer subsequent submissions.
 | 
						|
    // The pending ones that were created during the handler
 | 
						|
    // will be flushed or forgotten.
 | 
						|
    form->OnSubmitClickEnd();
 | 
						|
    // tell the form to flush a possible pending submission.
 | 
						|
    // the reason is that the script returned false (the event was
 | 
						|
    // not ignored) so if there is a stored submission, it needs to
 | 
						|
    // be submitted immediately.
 | 
						|
    form->FlushPendingSubmission();
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::ActivationBehavior(EventChainPostVisitor& aVisitor) {
 | 
						|
  auto oldType = FormControlType(NS_CONTROL_TYPE(aVisitor.mItemFlags));
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (IsDisabled() && oldType != FormControlType::InputCheckbox &&
 | 
						|
      oldType != FormControlType::InputRadio) {
 | 
						|
    // Behave as if defaultPrevented when the element becomes disabled by event
 | 
						|
    // listeners. Checkboxes and radio buttons should still process clicks for
 | 
						|
    // web compat. See:
 | 
						|
    // https://html.spec.whatwg.org/multipage/input.html#the-input-element:activation-behaviour
 | 
						|
    EndSubmitClick(aVisitor);
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (mCheckedIsToggled) {
 | 
						|
    SetUserInteracted(true);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // Fire input event and then change event.
 | 
						|
    DebugOnly<nsresult> rvIgnored = nsContentUtils::DispatchInputEvent(this);
 | 
						|
    NS_WARNING_ASSERTION(NS_SUCCEEDED(rvIgnored),
 | 
						|
                         "Failed to dispatch input event");
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // FIXME: Why is this different than every other change event?
 | 
						|
    nsContentUtils::DispatchTrustedEvent<WidgetEvent>(
 | 
						|
        OwnerDoc(), static_cast<Element*>(this), eFormChange, CanBubble::eYes,
 | 
						|
        Cancelable::eNo);
 | 
						|
#ifdef ACCESSIBILITY
 | 
						|
    // Fire an event to notify accessibility
 | 
						|
    if (mType == FormControlType::InputCheckbox) {
 | 
						|
      if (nsContentUtils::MayHaveFormCheckboxStateChangeListeners()) {
 | 
						|
        FireEventForAccessibility(this, eFormCheckboxStateChange);
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    } else if (nsContentUtils::MayHaveFormRadioStateChangeListeners()) {
 | 
						|
      FireEventForAccessibility(this, eFormRadioStateChange);
 | 
						|
      // Fire event for the previous selected radio.
 | 
						|
      nsCOMPtr<nsIContent> content = do_QueryInterface(aVisitor.mItemData);
 | 
						|
      if (auto* previous = HTMLInputElement::FromNodeOrNull(content)) {
 | 
						|
        FireEventForAccessibility(previous, eFormRadioStateChange);
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
#endif
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  switch (mType) {
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputReset:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputSubmit:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputImage:
 | 
						|
      if (mForm) {
 | 
						|
        // Hold a strong ref while dispatching
 | 
						|
        RefPtr<HTMLFormElement> form(mForm);
 | 
						|
        if (mType == FormControlType::InputReset) {
 | 
						|
          form->MaybeReset(this);
 | 
						|
        } else {
 | 
						|
          form->MaybeSubmit(this);
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
        aVisitor.mEventStatus = nsEventStatus_eConsumeNoDefault;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      break;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    default:
 | 
						|
      break;
 | 
						|
  }  // switch
 | 
						|
  if (IsButtonControl()) {
 | 
						|
    if (!GetInvokeTargetElement()) {
 | 
						|
      HandlePopoverTargetAction();
 | 
						|
    } else {
 | 
						|
      HandleInvokeTargetAction();
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  EndSubmitClick(aVisitor);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::LegacyCanceledActivationBehavior(
 | 
						|
    EventChainPostVisitor& aVisitor) {
 | 
						|
  bool originalCheckedValue =
 | 
						|
      !!(aVisitor.mItemFlags & NS_ORIGINAL_CHECKED_VALUE);
 | 
						|
  auto oldType = FormControlType(NS_CONTROL_TYPE(aVisitor.mItemFlags));
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (mCheckedIsToggled) {
 | 
						|
    // if it was canceled and a radio button, then set the old
 | 
						|
    // selected btn to TRUE. if it is a checkbox then set it to its
 | 
						|
    // original value (legacy-canceled-activation)
 | 
						|
    if (oldType == FormControlType::InputRadio) {
 | 
						|
      nsCOMPtr<nsIContent> content = do_QueryInterface(aVisitor.mItemData);
 | 
						|
      HTMLInputElement* selectedRadioButton =
 | 
						|
          HTMLInputElement::FromNodeOrNull(content);
 | 
						|
      if (selectedRadioButton) {
 | 
						|
        selectedRadioButton->SetChecked(true);
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      // If there was no checked radio button or this one is no longer a
 | 
						|
      // radio button we must reset it back to false to cancel the action.
 | 
						|
      // See how the web of hack grows?
 | 
						|
      if (!selectedRadioButton || mType != FormControlType::InputRadio) {
 | 
						|
        DoSetChecked(false, true, true);
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    } else if (oldType == FormControlType::InputCheckbox) {
 | 
						|
      bool originalIndeterminateValue =
 | 
						|
          !!(aVisitor.mItemFlags & NS_ORIGINAL_INDETERMINATE_VALUE);
 | 
						|
      SetIndeterminateInternal(originalIndeterminateValue, false);
 | 
						|
      DoSetChecked(originalCheckedValue, true, true);
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Relevant for bug 242494: submit button with "submit(); return false;"
 | 
						|
  EndSubmitClick(aVisitor);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
enum class RadioButtonMove { Back, Forward, None };
 | 
						|
nsresult HTMLInputElement::MaybeHandleRadioButtonNavigation(
 | 
						|
    EventChainPostVisitor& aVisitor, uint32_t aKeyCode) {
 | 
						|
  auto move = [&] {
 | 
						|
    switch (aKeyCode) {
 | 
						|
      case NS_VK_UP:
 | 
						|
        return RadioButtonMove::Back;
 | 
						|
      case NS_VK_DOWN:
 | 
						|
        return RadioButtonMove::Forward;
 | 
						|
      case NS_VK_LEFT:
 | 
						|
      case NS_VK_RIGHT: {
 | 
						|
        const bool isRtl = GetComputedDirectionality() == Directionality::Rtl;
 | 
						|
        return isRtl == (aKeyCode == NS_VK_LEFT) ? RadioButtonMove::Forward
 | 
						|
                                                 : RadioButtonMove::Back;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    return RadioButtonMove::None;
 | 
						|
  }();
 | 
						|
  if (move == RadioButtonMove::None) {
 | 
						|
    return NS_OK;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  // Arrow key pressed, focus+select prev/next radio button
 | 
						|
  RefPtr<HTMLInputElement> selectedRadioButton;
 | 
						|
  if (auto* container = GetCurrentRadioGroupContainer()) {
 | 
						|
    nsAutoString name;
 | 
						|
    GetAttr(nsGkAtoms::name, name);
 | 
						|
    container->GetNextRadioButton(name, move == RadioButtonMove::Back, this,
 | 
						|
                                  getter_AddRefs(selectedRadioButton));
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  if (!selectedRadioButton) {
 | 
						|
    return NS_OK;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  FocusOptions options;
 | 
						|
  ErrorResult error;
 | 
						|
  selectedRadioButton->Focus(options, CallerType::System, error);
 | 
						|
  if (error.Failed()) {
 | 
						|
    return error.StealNSResult();
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  nsresult rv = DispatchSimulatedClick(
 | 
						|
      selectedRadioButton, aVisitor.mEvent->IsTrusted(), aVisitor.mPresContext);
 | 
						|
  if (NS_SUCCEEDED(rv)) {
 | 
						|
    aVisitor.mEventStatus = nsEventStatus_eConsumeNoDefault;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return rv;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::PostHandleEventForRangeThumb(
 | 
						|
    EventChainPostVisitor& aVisitor) {
 | 
						|
  MOZ_ASSERT(mType == FormControlType::InputRange);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (nsEventStatus_eConsumeNoDefault == aVisitor.mEventStatus ||
 | 
						|
      !(aVisitor.mEvent->mClass == eMouseEventClass ||
 | 
						|
        aVisitor.mEvent->mClass == eTouchEventClass ||
 | 
						|
        aVisitor.mEvent->mClass == eKeyboardEventClass)) {
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  nsRangeFrame* rangeFrame = do_QueryFrame(GetPrimaryFrame());
 | 
						|
  if (!rangeFrame && mIsDraggingRange) {
 | 
						|
    CancelRangeThumbDrag();
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  switch (aVisitor.mEvent->mMessage) {
 | 
						|
    case eMouseDown:
 | 
						|
    case eTouchStart: {
 | 
						|
      if (mIsDraggingRange) {
 | 
						|
        break;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      if (PresShell::GetCapturingContent()) {
 | 
						|
        break;  // don't start drag if someone else is already capturing
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      WidgetInputEvent* inputEvent = aVisitor.mEvent->AsInputEvent();
 | 
						|
      if (IgnoreInputEventWithModifier(*inputEvent, true)) {
 | 
						|
        break;  // ignore
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      if (aVisitor.mEvent->mMessage == eMouseDown) {
 | 
						|
        if (aVisitor.mEvent->AsMouseEvent()->mButtons ==
 | 
						|
            MouseButtonsFlag::ePrimaryFlag) {
 | 
						|
          StartRangeThumbDrag(inputEvent);
 | 
						|
        } else if (mIsDraggingRange) {
 | 
						|
          CancelRangeThumbDrag();
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
      } else {
 | 
						|
        if (aVisitor.mEvent->AsTouchEvent()->mTouches.Length() == 1) {
 | 
						|
          StartRangeThumbDrag(inputEvent);
 | 
						|
        } else if (mIsDraggingRange) {
 | 
						|
          CancelRangeThumbDrag();
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      aVisitor.mEvent->mFlags.mMultipleActionsPrevented = true;
 | 
						|
    } break;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    case eMouseMove:
 | 
						|
    case eTouchMove:
 | 
						|
      if (!mIsDraggingRange) {
 | 
						|
        break;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      if (PresShell::GetCapturingContent() != this) {
 | 
						|
        // Someone else grabbed capture.
 | 
						|
        CancelRangeThumbDrag();
 | 
						|
        break;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      SetValueOfRangeForUserEvent(
 | 
						|
          rangeFrame->GetValueAtEventPoint(aVisitor.mEvent->AsInputEvent()),
 | 
						|
          SnapToTickMarks::Yes);
 | 
						|
      aVisitor.mEvent->mFlags.mMultipleActionsPrevented = true;
 | 
						|
      break;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    case eMouseUp:
 | 
						|
    case eTouchEnd:
 | 
						|
      if (!mIsDraggingRange) {
 | 
						|
        break;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      // We don't check to see whether we are the capturing content here and
 | 
						|
      // call CancelRangeThumbDrag() if that is the case. We just finish off
 | 
						|
      // the drag and set our final value (unless someone has called
 | 
						|
      // preventDefault() and prevents us getting here).
 | 
						|
      FinishRangeThumbDrag(aVisitor.mEvent->AsInputEvent());
 | 
						|
      aVisitor.mEvent->mFlags.mMultipleActionsPrevented = true;
 | 
						|
      break;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    case eKeyPress:
 | 
						|
      if (mIsDraggingRange &&
 | 
						|
          aVisitor.mEvent->AsKeyboardEvent()->mKeyCode == NS_VK_ESCAPE) {
 | 
						|
        CancelRangeThumbDrag();
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      break;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    case eTouchCancel:
 | 
						|
      if (mIsDraggingRange) {
 | 
						|
        CancelRangeThumbDrag();
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      break;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    default:
 | 
						|
      break;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::MaybeLoadImage() {
 | 
						|
  // Our base URI may have changed; claim that our URI changed, and the
 | 
						|
  // nsImageLoadingContent will decide whether a new image load is warranted.
 | 
						|
  nsAutoString uri;
 | 
						|
  if (mType == FormControlType::InputImage && GetAttr(nsGkAtoms::src, uri) &&
 | 
						|
      (NS_FAILED(LoadImage(uri, false, true, eImageLoadType_Normal,
 | 
						|
                           mSrcTriggeringPrincipal)) ||
 | 
						|
       !LoadingEnabled())) {
 | 
						|
    CancelImageRequests(true);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
nsresult HTMLInputElement::BindToTree(BindContext& aContext, nsINode& aParent) {
 | 
						|
  // If we are currently bound to a disconnected subtree root, remove
 | 
						|
  // ourselves from it first.
 | 
						|
  if (!mForm && mType == FormControlType::InputRadio) {
 | 
						|
    RemoveFromRadioGroup();
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  nsresult rv =
 | 
						|
      nsGenericHTMLFormControlElementWithState::BindToTree(aContext, aParent);
 | 
						|
  NS_ENSURE_SUCCESS(rv, rv);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  nsImageLoadingContent::BindToTree(aContext, aParent);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (mType == FormControlType::InputImage) {
 | 
						|
    // Our base URI may have changed; claim that our URI changed, and the
 | 
						|
    // nsImageLoadingContent will decide whether a new image load is warranted.
 | 
						|
    if (HasAttr(nsGkAtoms::src)) {
 | 
						|
      // Mark channel as urgent-start before load image if the image load is
 | 
						|
      // initaiated by a user interaction.
 | 
						|
      mUseUrgentStartForChannel = UserActivation::IsHandlingUserInput();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      nsContentUtils::AddScriptRunner(
 | 
						|
          NewRunnableMethod("dom::HTMLInputElement::MaybeLoadImage", this,
 | 
						|
                            &HTMLInputElement::MaybeLoadImage));
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Add radio to document if we don't have a form already (if we do it's
 | 
						|
  // already been added into that group)
 | 
						|
  if (!mForm && mType == FormControlType::InputRadio) {
 | 
						|
    AddToRadioGroup();
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Set direction based on value if dir=auto
 | 
						|
  if (HasDirAuto()) {
 | 
						|
    SetAutoDirectionality(false);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // An element can't suffer from value missing if it is not in a document.
 | 
						|
  // We have to check if we suffer from that as we are now in a document.
 | 
						|
  UpdateValueMissingValidityState();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // If there is a disabled fieldset in the parent chain, the element is now
 | 
						|
  // barred from constraint validation and can't suffer from value missing
 | 
						|
  // (call done before).
 | 
						|
  UpdateBarredFromConstraintValidation();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // And now make sure our state is up to date
 | 
						|
  UpdateValidityElementStates(true);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (CreatesDateTimeWidget() && IsInComposedDoc()) {
 | 
						|
    // Construct Shadow Root so web content can be hidden in the DOM.
 | 
						|
    AttachAndSetUAShadowRoot(NotifyUAWidgetSetup::Yes, DelegatesFocus::Yes);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  MaybeDispatchLoginManagerEvents(mForm);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return rv;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::MaybeDispatchLoginManagerEvents(HTMLFormElement* aForm) {
 | 
						|
  // Don't disptach the event if the <input> is disconnected
 | 
						|
  // or belongs to a disconnected form
 | 
						|
  if (!IsInComposedDoc()) {
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  nsString eventType;
 | 
						|
  Element* target = nullptr;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (mType == FormControlType::InputPassword) {
 | 
						|
    // Don't fire another event if we have a pending event.
 | 
						|
    if (aForm && aForm->mHasPendingPasswordEvent) {
 | 
						|
      return;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // TODO(Bug 1864404): Use one event for formless and form inputs.
 | 
						|
    eventType = aForm ? u"DOMFormHasPassword"_ns : u"DOMInputPasswordAdded"_ns;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    target = aForm ? static_cast<Element*>(aForm) : this;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    if (aForm) {
 | 
						|
      aForm->mHasPendingPasswordEvent = true;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  } else if (mType == FormControlType::InputEmail ||
 | 
						|
             mType == FormControlType::InputText) {
 | 
						|
    // Don't fire a username event if:
 | 
						|
    // - <input> is not part of a form
 | 
						|
    // - we have a pending event
 | 
						|
    // - username only forms are not supported
 | 
						|
    if (!aForm || aForm->mHasPendingPossibleUsernameEvent ||
 | 
						|
        !StaticPrefs::signon_usernameOnlyForm_enabled()) {
 | 
						|
      return;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    eventType = u"DOMFormHasPossibleUsername"_ns;
 | 
						|
    target = aForm;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    aForm->mHasPendingPossibleUsernameEvent = true;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  } else {
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  RefPtr<AsyncEventDispatcher> dispatcher = new AsyncEventDispatcher(
 | 
						|
      target, eventType, CanBubble::eYes, ChromeOnlyDispatch::eYes);
 | 
						|
  dispatcher->PostDOMEvent();
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::UnbindFromTree(UnbindContext& aContext) {
 | 
						|
  if (mType == FormControlType::InputPassword) {
 | 
						|
    MaybeFireInputPasswordRemoved();
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // If we have a form and are unbound from it,
 | 
						|
  // nsGenericHTMLFormControlElementWithState::UnbindFromTree() will unset the
 | 
						|
  // form and that takes care of form's WillRemove so we just have to take care
 | 
						|
  // of the case where we're removing from the document and we don't
 | 
						|
  // have a form
 | 
						|
  if (!mForm && mType == FormControlType::InputRadio) {
 | 
						|
    RemoveFromRadioGroup();
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (CreatesDateTimeWidget() && IsInComposedDoc()) {
 | 
						|
    NotifyUAWidgetTeardown();
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  nsImageLoadingContent::UnbindFromTree();
 | 
						|
  nsGenericHTMLFormControlElementWithState::UnbindFromTree(aContext);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // If we are contained within a disconnected subtree, attempt to add
 | 
						|
  // ourselves to the subtree root's radio group.
 | 
						|
  if (!mForm && mType == FormControlType::InputRadio) {
 | 
						|
    AddToRadioGroup();
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // GetCurrentDoc is returning nullptr so we can update the value
 | 
						|
  // missing validity state to reflect we are no longer into a doc.
 | 
						|
  UpdateValueMissingValidityState();
 | 
						|
  // We might be no longer disabled because of parent chain changed.
 | 
						|
  UpdateBarredFromConstraintValidation();
 | 
						|
  // And now make sure our state is up to date
 | 
						|
  UpdateValidityElementStates(false);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/**
 | 
						|
 * @param aType InputElementTypes
 | 
						|
 * @return true, iff SetRangeText applies to aType as specified at
 | 
						|
 * https://html.spec.whatwg.org/#concept-input-apply.
 | 
						|
 */
 | 
						|
static bool SetRangeTextApplies(FormControlType aType) {
 | 
						|
  return aType == FormControlType::InputText ||
 | 
						|
         aType == FormControlType::InputSearch ||
 | 
						|
         aType == FormControlType::InputUrl ||
 | 
						|
         aType == FormControlType::InputTel ||
 | 
						|
         aType == FormControlType::InputPassword;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::HandleTypeChange(FormControlType aNewType,
 | 
						|
                                        bool aNotify) {
 | 
						|
  FormControlType oldType = mType;
 | 
						|
  MOZ_ASSERT(oldType != aNewType);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  mHasBeenTypePassword =
 | 
						|
      mHasBeenTypePassword || aNewType == FormControlType::InputPassword;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (nsFocusManager* fm = nsFocusManager::GetFocusManager()) {
 | 
						|
    // Input element can represent very different kinds of UIs, and we may
 | 
						|
    // need to flush styling even when focusing the already focused input
 | 
						|
    // element.
 | 
						|
    fm->NeedsFlushBeforeEventHandling(this);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (oldType == FormControlType::InputPassword &&
 | 
						|
      State().HasState(ElementState::REVEALED)) {
 | 
						|
    // Modify the state directly to avoid dispatching events.
 | 
						|
    RemoveStates(ElementState::REVEALED, aNotify);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (aNewType == FormControlType::InputFile ||
 | 
						|
      oldType == FormControlType::InputFile) {
 | 
						|
    if (aNewType == FormControlType::InputFile) {
 | 
						|
      mFileData.reset(new FileData());
 | 
						|
    } else {
 | 
						|
      mFileData->Unlink();
 | 
						|
      mFileData = nullptr;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (oldType == FormControlType::InputRange && mIsDraggingRange) {
 | 
						|
    CancelRangeThumbDrag(false);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  const ValueModeType oldValueMode = GetValueMode();
 | 
						|
  nsAutoString oldValue;
 | 
						|
  if (oldValueMode == VALUE_MODE_VALUE) {
 | 
						|
    // Doesn't matter what caller type we pass here, since we know we're not a
 | 
						|
    // file input anyway.
 | 
						|
    GetValue(oldValue, CallerType::NonSystem);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  TextControlState::SelectionProperties sp;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (IsSingleLineTextControl(false) && mInputData.mState) {
 | 
						|
    mInputData.mState->SyncUpSelectionPropertiesBeforeDestruction();
 | 
						|
    sp = mInputData.mState->GetSelectionProperties();
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // We already have a copy of the value, lets free it and changes the type.
 | 
						|
  FreeData();
 | 
						|
  mType = aNewType;
 | 
						|
  void* memory = mInputTypeMem;
 | 
						|
  mInputType = InputType::Create(this, mType, memory);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (IsSingleLineTextControl()) {
 | 
						|
    mInputData.mState = TextControlState::Construct(this);
 | 
						|
    if (!sp.IsDefault()) {
 | 
						|
      mInputData.mState->SetSelectionProperties(sp);
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Whether placeholder applies might have changed.
 | 
						|
  UpdatePlaceholderShownState();
 | 
						|
  // Whether readonly applies might have changed.
 | 
						|
  UpdateReadOnlyState(aNotify);
 | 
						|
  UpdateCheckedState(aNotify);
 | 
						|
  UpdateIndeterminateState(aNotify);
 | 
						|
  const bool isDefault = IsRadioOrCheckbox()
 | 
						|
                             ? DefaultChecked()
 | 
						|
                             : (mForm && mForm->IsDefaultSubmitElement(this));
 | 
						|
  SetStates(ElementState::DEFAULT, isDefault, aNotify);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // https://html.spec.whatwg.org/#input-type-change
 | 
						|
  switch (GetValueMode()) {
 | 
						|
    case VALUE_MODE_DEFAULT:
 | 
						|
    case VALUE_MODE_DEFAULT_ON:
 | 
						|
      // 1. If the previous state of the element's type attribute put the value
 | 
						|
      //    IDL attribute in the value mode, and the element's value is not the
 | 
						|
      //    empty string, and the new state of the element's type attribute puts
 | 
						|
      //    the value IDL attribute in either the default mode or the default/on
 | 
						|
      //    mode, then set the element's value content attribute to the
 | 
						|
      //    element's value.
 | 
						|
      if (oldValueMode == VALUE_MODE_VALUE && !oldValue.IsEmpty()) {
 | 
						|
        SetAttr(kNameSpaceID_None, nsGkAtoms::value, oldValue, true);
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      break;
 | 
						|
    case VALUE_MODE_VALUE: {
 | 
						|
      ValueSetterOptions options{ValueSetterOption::ByInternalAPI};
 | 
						|
      if (!SetRangeTextApplies(oldType) && SetRangeTextApplies(mType)) {
 | 
						|
        options +=
 | 
						|
            ValueSetterOption::MoveCursorToBeginSetSelectionDirectionForward;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      if (oldValueMode != VALUE_MODE_VALUE) {
 | 
						|
        // 2. Otherwise, if the previous state of the element's type attribute
 | 
						|
        //    put the value IDL attribute in any mode other than the value
 | 
						|
        //    mode, and the new state of the element's type attribute puts the
 | 
						|
        //    value IDL attribute in the value mode, then set the value of the
 | 
						|
        //    element to the value of the value content attribute, if there is
 | 
						|
        //    one, or the empty string otherwise, and then set the control's
 | 
						|
        //    dirty value flag to false.
 | 
						|
        nsAutoString value;
 | 
						|
        GetAttr(nsGkAtoms::value, value);
 | 
						|
        SetValueInternal(value, options);
 | 
						|
        SetValueChanged(false);
 | 
						|
      } else if (mValueChanged) {
 | 
						|
        // We're both in the "value" mode state, we need to make no change per
 | 
						|
        // spec, but due to how we store the value internally we need to call
 | 
						|
        // SetValueInternal, if our value had changed at all.
 | 
						|
        // TODO: What should we do if SetValueInternal fails?  (The allocation
 | 
						|
        // may potentially be big, but most likely we've failed to allocate
 | 
						|
        // before the type change.)
 | 
						|
        SetValueInternal(oldValue, options);
 | 
						|
      } else {
 | 
						|
        // The value dirty flag is not set, so our value is based on our default
 | 
						|
        // value. But our default value might be dependent on the type. Make
 | 
						|
        // sure to set it so that state is consistent.
 | 
						|
        SetDefaultValueAsValue();
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      break;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    case VALUE_MODE_FILENAME:
 | 
						|
    default:
 | 
						|
      // 3. Otherwise, if the previous state of the element's type attribute
 | 
						|
      //    put the value IDL attribute in any mode other than the filename
 | 
						|
      //    mode, and the new state of the element's type attribute puts the
 | 
						|
      //    value IDL attribute in the filename mode, then set the value of the
 | 
						|
      //    element to the empty string.
 | 
						|
      //
 | 
						|
      // Setting the attribute to the empty string is basically calling
 | 
						|
      // ClearFiles, but there can't be any files.
 | 
						|
      break;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Updating mFocusedValue in consequence:
 | 
						|
  // If the new type fires a change event on blur, but the previous type
 | 
						|
  // doesn't, we should set mFocusedValue to the current value.
 | 
						|
  // Otherwise, if the new type doesn't fire a change event on blur, but the
 | 
						|
  // previous type does, we should clear out mFocusedValue.
 | 
						|
  if (MayFireChangeOnBlur(mType) && !MayFireChangeOnBlur(oldType)) {
 | 
						|
    GetValue(mFocusedValue, CallerType::System);
 | 
						|
  } else if (!IsSingleLineTextControl(false, mType) &&
 | 
						|
             IsSingleLineTextControl(false, oldType)) {
 | 
						|
    mFocusedValue.Truncate();
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Update or clear our required states since we may have changed from a
 | 
						|
  // required input type to a non-required input type or viceversa.
 | 
						|
  if (DoesRequiredApply()) {
 | 
						|
    const bool isRequired = HasAttr(nsGkAtoms::required);
 | 
						|
    UpdateRequiredState(isRequired, aNotify);
 | 
						|
  } else {
 | 
						|
    RemoveStates(ElementState::REQUIRED_STATES, aNotify);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  UpdateHasRange(aNotify);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Update validity states, but not element state.  We'll update
 | 
						|
  // element state later, as part of this attribute change.
 | 
						|
  UpdateAllValidityStatesButNotElementState();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  UpdateApzAwareFlag();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  UpdateBarredFromConstraintValidation();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Changing type may affect auto directionality, or non-auto directionality
 | 
						|
  // because of the special-case for <input type=tel>, as specified in
 | 
						|
  // https://html.spec.whatwg.org/multipage/dom.html#the-directionality
 | 
						|
  if (HasDirAuto()) {
 | 
						|
    const bool autoDirAssociated = IsAutoDirectionalityAssociated(mType);
 | 
						|
    if (IsAutoDirectionalityAssociated(oldType) != autoDirAssociated) {
 | 
						|
      SetAutoDirectionality(aNotify);
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  } else if (oldType == FormControlType::InputTel ||
 | 
						|
             mType == FormControlType::InputTel) {
 | 
						|
    RecomputeDirectionality(this, aNotify);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (oldType == FormControlType::InputImage ||
 | 
						|
      mType == FormControlType::InputImage) {
 | 
						|
    if (oldType == FormControlType::InputImage) {
 | 
						|
      // We're no longer an image input.  Cancel our image requests, if we have
 | 
						|
      // any.
 | 
						|
      CancelImageRequests(aNotify);
 | 
						|
      RemoveStates(ElementState::BROKEN, aNotify);
 | 
						|
    } else {
 | 
						|
      // We just got switched to be an image input; we should see whether we
 | 
						|
      // have an image to load;
 | 
						|
      bool hasSrc = false;
 | 
						|
      if (aNotify) {
 | 
						|
        nsAutoString src;
 | 
						|
        if ((hasSrc = GetAttr(nsGkAtoms::src, src))) {
 | 
						|
          // Mark channel as urgent-start before load image if the image load is
 | 
						|
          // initiated by a user interaction.
 | 
						|
          mUseUrgentStartForChannel = UserActivation::IsHandlingUserInput();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          LoadImage(src, false, aNotify, eImageLoadType_Normal,
 | 
						|
                    mSrcTriggeringPrincipal);
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
      } else {
 | 
						|
        hasSrc = HasAttr(nsGkAtoms::src);
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      if (!hasSrc) {
 | 
						|
        AddStates(ElementState::BROKEN, aNotify);
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    // We should update our mapped attribute mapping function.
 | 
						|
    if (mAttrs.HasAttrs() && !mAttrs.IsPendingMappedAttributeEvaluation()) {
 | 
						|
      mAttrs.InfallibleMarkAsPendingPresAttributeEvaluation();
 | 
						|
      if (auto* doc = GetComposedDoc()) {
 | 
						|
        doc->ScheduleForPresAttrEvaluation(this);
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  MaybeDispatchLoginManagerEvents(mForm);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (IsInComposedDoc()) {
 | 
						|
    if (CreatesDateTimeWidget(oldType)) {
 | 
						|
      if (!CreatesDateTimeWidget()) {
 | 
						|
        // Switch away from date/time type.
 | 
						|
        NotifyUAWidgetTeardown();
 | 
						|
      } else {
 | 
						|
        // Switch between date and time.
 | 
						|
        NotifyUAWidgetSetupOrChange();
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    } else if (CreatesDateTimeWidget()) {
 | 
						|
      // Switch to date/time type.
 | 
						|
      AttachAndSetUAShadowRoot(NotifyUAWidgetSetup::Yes, DelegatesFocus::Yes);
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    // If we're becoming a text control and have focus, make sure to show focus
 | 
						|
    // rings.
 | 
						|
    if (State().HasState(ElementState::FOCUS) && IsSingleLineTextControl() &&
 | 
						|
        !IsSingleLineTextControl(/* aExcludePassword = */ false, oldType)) {
 | 
						|
      AddStates(ElementState::FOCUSRING);
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::MaybeSnapToTickMark(Decimal& aValue) {
 | 
						|
  nsRangeFrame* rangeFrame = do_QueryFrame(GetPrimaryFrame());
 | 
						|
  if (!rangeFrame) {
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  auto tickMark = rangeFrame->NearestTickMark(aValue);
 | 
						|
  if (tickMark.isNaN()) {
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  auto rangeFrameSize = CSSPixel::FromAppUnits(rangeFrame->GetSize());
 | 
						|
  CSSCoord rangeTrackLength;
 | 
						|
  if (rangeFrame->IsHorizontal()) {
 | 
						|
    rangeTrackLength = rangeFrameSize.width;
 | 
						|
  } else {
 | 
						|
    rangeTrackLength = rangeFrameSize.height;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  auto stepBase = GetStepBase();
 | 
						|
  auto distanceToTickMark =
 | 
						|
      rangeTrackLength * float(rangeFrame->GetDoubleAsFractionOfRange(
 | 
						|
                             stepBase + (tickMark - aValue).abs()));
 | 
						|
  const CSSCoord magnetEffectRange(
 | 
						|
      StaticPrefs::dom_range_element_magnet_effect_threshold());
 | 
						|
  if (distanceToTickMark <= magnetEffectRange) {
 | 
						|
    aValue = tickMark;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::SanitizeValue(nsAString& aValue,
 | 
						|
                                     SanitizationKind aKind) const {
 | 
						|
  NS_ASSERTION(mDoneCreating, "The element creation should be finished!");
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  switch (mType) {
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputText:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputSearch:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputTel:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputPassword: {
 | 
						|
      aValue.StripCRLF();
 | 
						|
    } break;
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputEmail: {
 | 
						|
      aValue.StripCRLF();
 | 
						|
      aValue = nsContentUtils::TrimWhitespace<nsContentUtils::IsHTMLWhitespace>(
 | 
						|
          aValue);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      if (Multiple() && !aValue.IsEmpty()) {
 | 
						|
        nsAutoString oldValue(aValue);
 | 
						|
        HTMLSplitOnSpacesTokenizer tokenizer(oldValue, ',');
 | 
						|
        aValue.Truncate(0);
 | 
						|
        aValue.Append(tokenizer.nextToken());
 | 
						|
        while (tokenizer.hasMoreTokens() ||
 | 
						|
               tokenizer.separatorAfterCurrentToken()) {
 | 
						|
          aValue.Append(',');
 | 
						|
          aValue.Append(tokenizer.nextToken());
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    } break;
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputUrl: {
 | 
						|
      aValue.StripCRLF();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      aValue = nsContentUtils::TrimWhitespace<nsContentUtils::IsHTMLWhitespace>(
 | 
						|
          aValue);
 | 
						|
    } break;
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputNumber: {
 | 
						|
      if (aKind == SanitizationKind::ForValueSetter && !aValue.IsEmpty() &&
 | 
						|
          (aValue.First() == '+' || aValue.Last() == '.')) {
 | 
						|
        // A value with a leading plus or trailing dot should fail to parse.
 | 
						|
        // However, the localized parser accepts this, and when we convert it
 | 
						|
        // back to a Decimal, it disappears. So, we need to check first.
 | 
						|
        //
 | 
						|
        // FIXME(emilio): Should we just use the unlocalized parser
 | 
						|
        // (StringToDecimal) for the value setter? Other browsers don't seem to
 | 
						|
        // allow setting localized strings there, and that way we don't need
 | 
						|
        // this special-case.
 | 
						|
        aValue.Truncate();
 | 
						|
        return;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      InputType::StringToNumberResult result =
 | 
						|
          mInputType->ConvertStringToNumber(aValue);
 | 
						|
      if (!result.mResult.isFinite()) {
 | 
						|
        aValue.Truncate();
 | 
						|
        return;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      switch (aKind) {
 | 
						|
        case SanitizationKind::ForValueGetter: {
 | 
						|
          // If the default non-localized algorithm parses the value, then we're
 | 
						|
          // done, don't un-localize it, to avoid precision loss, and to
 | 
						|
          // preserve scientific notation as well for example.
 | 
						|
          if (!result.mLocalized) {
 | 
						|
            return;
 | 
						|
          }
 | 
						|
          // For the <input type=number> value getter, we return the unlocalized
 | 
						|
          // value if it doesn't parse as StringToDecimal, for compat with other
 | 
						|
          // browsers.
 | 
						|
          char buf[32];
 | 
						|
          DebugOnly<bool> ok = result.mResult.toString(buf, ArrayLength(buf));
 | 
						|
          aValue.AssignASCII(buf);
 | 
						|
          MOZ_ASSERT(ok, "buf not big enough");
 | 
						|
          break;
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
        case SanitizationKind::ForDisplay:
 | 
						|
        case SanitizationKind::ForValueSetter: {
 | 
						|
          // We localize as needed, but if both the localized and unlocalized
 | 
						|
          // version parse with the generic parser, we just use the unlocalized
 | 
						|
          // one, to preserve the input as much as possible.
 | 
						|
          //
 | 
						|
          // FIXME(emilio, bug 1622808): Localization should ideally be more
 | 
						|
          // input-preserving.
 | 
						|
          nsString localizedValue;
 | 
						|
          mInputType->ConvertNumberToString(result.mResult, localizedValue);
 | 
						|
          if (!StringToDecimal(localizedValue).isFinite()) {
 | 
						|
            aValue = std::move(localizedValue);
 | 
						|
          }
 | 
						|
          break;
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      break;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputRange: {
 | 
						|
      Decimal minimum = GetMinimum();
 | 
						|
      Decimal maximum = GetMaximum();
 | 
						|
      MOZ_ASSERT(minimum.isFinite() && maximum.isFinite(),
 | 
						|
                 "type=range should have a default maximum/minimum");
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      // We use this to avoid modifying the string unnecessarily, since that
 | 
						|
      // may introduce rounding. This is set to true only if the value we
 | 
						|
      // parse out from aValue needs to be sanitized.
 | 
						|
      bool needSanitization = false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      Decimal value = mInputType->ConvertStringToNumber(aValue).mResult;
 | 
						|
      if (!value.isFinite()) {
 | 
						|
        needSanitization = true;
 | 
						|
        // Set value to midway between minimum and maximum.
 | 
						|
        value = maximum <= minimum ? minimum
 | 
						|
                                   : minimum + (maximum - minimum) / Decimal(2);
 | 
						|
      } else if (value < minimum || maximum < minimum) {
 | 
						|
        needSanitization = true;
 | 
						|
        value = minimum;
 | 
						|
      } else if (value > maximum) {
 | 
						|
        needSanitization = true;
 | 
						|
        value = maximum;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      Decimal step = GetStep();
 | 
						|
      if (step != kStepAny) {
 | 
						|
        Decimal stepBase = GetStepBase();
 | 
						|
        // There could be rounding issues below when dealing with fractional
 | 
						|
        // numbers, but let's ignore that until ECMAScript supplies us with a
 | 
						|
        // decimal number type.
 | 
						|
        Decimal deltaToStep = NS_floorModulo(value - stepBase, step);
 | 
						|
        if (deltaToStep != Decimal(0)) {
 | 
						|
          // "suffering from a step mismatch"
 | 
						|
          // Round the element's value to the nearest number for which the
 | 
						|
          // element would not suffer from a step mismatch, and which is
 | 
						|
          // greater than or equal to the minimum, and, if the maximum is not
 | 
						|
          // less than the minimum, which is less than or equal to the
 | 
						|
          // maximum, if there is a number that matches these constraints:
 | 
						|
          MOZ_ASSERT(deltaToStep > Decimal(0),
 | 
						|
                     "stepBelow/stepAbove will be wrong");
 | 
						|
          Decimal stepBelow = value - deltaToStep;
 | 
						|
          Decimal stepAbove = value - deltaToStep + step;
 | 
						|
          Decimal halfStep = step / Decimal(2);
 | 
						|
          bool stepAboveIsClosest = (stepAbove - value) <= halfStep;
 | 
						|
          bool stepAboveInRange = stepAbove >= minimum && stepAbove <= maximum;
 | 
						|
          bool stepBelowInRange = stepBelow >= minimum && stepBelow <= maximum;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
          if ((stepAboveIsClosest || !stepBelowInRange) && stepAboveInRange) {
 | 
						|
            needSanitization = true;
 | 
						|
            value = stepAbove;
 | 
						|
          } else if ((!stepAboveIsClosest || !stepAboveInRange) &&
 | 
						|
                     stepBelowInRange) {
 | 
						|
            needSanitization = true;
 | 
						|
            value = stepBelow;
 | 
						|
          }
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      if (needSanitization) {
 | 
						|
        char buf[32];
 | 
						|
        DebugOnly<bool> ok = value.toString(buf, ArrayLength(buf));
 | 
						|
        aValue.AssignASCII(buf);
 | 
						|
        MOZ_ASSERT(ok, "buf not big enough");
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    } break;
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputDate: {
 | 
						|
      if (!aValue.IsEmpty() && !IsValidDate(aValue)) {
 | 
						|
        aValue.Truncate();
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    } break;
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputTime: {
 | 
						|
      if (!aValue.IsEmpty() && !IsValidTime(aValue)) {
 | 
						|
        aValue.Truncate();
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    } break;
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputMonth: {
 | 
						|
      if (!aValue.IsEmpty() && !IsValidMonth(aValue)) {
 | 
						|
        aValue.Truncate();
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    } break;
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputWeek: {
 | 
						|
      if (!aValue.IsEmpty() && !IsValidWeek(aValue)) {
 | 
						|
        aValue.Truncate();
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    } break;
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputDatetimeLocal: {
 | 
						|
      if (!aValue.IsEmpty() && !IsValidDateTimeLocal(aValue)) {
 | 
						|
        aValue.Truncate();
 | 
						|
      } else {
 | 
						|
        NormalizeDateTimeLocal(aValue);
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    } break;
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputColor: {
 | 
						|
      if (IsValidSimpleColor(aValue)) {
 | 
						|
        ToLowerCase(aValue);
 | 
						|
      } else {
 | 
						|
        // Set default (black) color, if aValue wasn't parsed correctly.
 | 
						|
        aValue.AssignLiteral("#000000");
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    } break;
 | 
						|
    default:
 | 
						|
      break;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
Maybe<nscolor> HTMLInputElement::ParseSimpleColor(const nsAString& aColor) {
 | 
						|
  // Input color string should be 7 length (i.e. a string representing a valid
 | 
						|
  // simple color)
 | 
						|
  if (aColor.Length() != 7 || aColor.First() != '#') {
 | 
						|
    return {};
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  const nsAString& withoutHash = StringTail(aColor, 6);
 | 
						|
  nscolor color;
 | 
						|
  if (!NS_HexToRGBA(withoutHash, nsHexColorType::NoAlpha, &color)) {
 | 
						|
    return {};
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return Some(color);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
bool HTMLInputElement::IsValidSimpleColor(const nsAString& aValue) const {
 | 
						|
  if (aValue.Length() != 7 || aValue.First() != '#') {
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  for (int i = 1; i < 7; ++i) {
 | 
						|
    if (!IsAsciiDigit(aValue[i]) && !(aValue[i] >= 'a' && aValue[i] <= 'f') &&
 | 
						|
        !(aValue[i] >= 'A' && aValue[i] <= 'F')) {
 | 
						|
      return false;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return true;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
bool HTMLInputElement::IsLeapYear(uint32_t aYear) const {
 | 
						|
  if ((aYear % 4 == 0 && aYear % 100 != 0) || (aYear % 400 == 0)) {
 | 
						|
    return true;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return false;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
uint32_t HTMLInputElement::DayOfWeek(uint32_t aYear, uint32_t aMonth,
 | 
						|
                                     uint32_t aDay, bool isoWeek) const {
 | 
						|
  MOZ_ASSERT(1 <= aMonth && aMonth <= 12, "month is in 1..12");
 | 
						|
  MOZ_ASSERT(1 <= aDay && aDay <= 31, "day is in 1..31");
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Tomohiko Sakamoto algorithm.
 | 
						|
  int monthTable[] = {0, 3, 2, 5, 0, 3, 5, 1, 4, 6, 2, 4};
 | 
						|
  aYear -= aMonth < 3;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  uint32_t day = (aYear + aYear / 4 - aYear / 100 + aYear / 400 +
 | 
						|
                  monthTable[aMonth - 1] + aDay) %
 | 
						|
                 7;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (isoWeek) {
 | 
						|
    return ((day + 6) % 7) + 1;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return day;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
uint32_t HTMLInputElement::MaximumWeekInYear(uint32_t aYear) const {
 | 
						|
  int day = DayOfWeek(aYear, 1, 1, true);  // January 1.
 | 
						|
  // A year starting on Thursday or a leap year starting on Wednesday has 53
 | 
						|
  // weeks. All other years have 52 weeks.
 | 
						|
  return day == 4 || (day == 3 && IsLeapYear(aYear)) ? kMaximumWeekInYear
 | 
						|
                                                     : kMaximumWeekInYear - 1;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
bool HTMLInputElement::IsValidWeek(const nsAString& aValue) const {
 | 
						|
  uint32_t year, week;
 | 
						|
  return ParseWeek(aValue, &year, &week);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
bool HTMLInputElement::IsValidMonth(const nsAString& aValue) const {
 | 
						|
  uint32_t year, month;
 | 
						|
  return ParseMonth(aValue, &year, &month);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
bool HTMLInputElement::IsValidDate(const nsAString& aValue) const {
 | 
						|
  uint32_t year, month, day;
 | 
						|
  return ParseDate(aValue, &year, &month, &day);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
bool HTMLInputElement::IsValidDateTimeLocal(const nsAString& aValue) const {
 | 
						|
  uint32_t year, month, day, time;
 | 
						|
  return ParseDateTimeLocal(aValue, &year, &month, &day, &time);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
bool HTMLInputElement::ParseYear(const nsAString& aValue,
 | 
						|
                                 uint32_t* aYear) const {
 | 
						|
  if (aValue.Length() < 4) {
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return DigitSubStringToNumber(aValue, 0, aValue.Length(), aYear) &&
 | 
						|
         *aYear > 0;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
bool HTMLInputElement::ParseMonth(const nsAString& aValue, uint32_t* aYear,
 | 
						|
                                  uint32_t* aMonth) const {
 | 
						|
  // Parse the year, month values out a string formatted as 'yyyy-mm'.
 | 
						|
  if (aValue.Length() < 7) {
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  uint32_t endOfYearOffset = aValue.Length() - 3;
 | 
						|
  if (aValue[endOfYearOffset] != '-') {
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  const nsAString& yearStr = Substring(aValue, 0, endOfYearOffset);
 | 
						|
  if (!ParseYear(yearStr, aYear)) {
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return DigitSubStringToNumber(aValue, endOfYearOffset + 1, 2, aMonth) &&
 | 
						|
         *aMonth > 0 && *aMonth <= 12;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
bool HTMLInputElement::ParseWeek(const nsAString& aValue, uint32_t* aYear,
 | 
						|
                                 uint32_t* aWeek) const {
 | 
						|
  // Parse the year, month values out a string formatted as 'yyyy-Www'.
 | 
						|
  if (aValue.Length() < 8) {
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  uint32_t endOfYearOffset = aValue.Length() - 4;
 | 
						|
  if (aValue[endOfYearOffset] != '-') {
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (aValue[endOfYearOffset + 1] != 'W') {
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  const nsAString& yearStr = Substring(aValue, 0, endOfYearOffset);
 | 
						|
  if (!ParseYear(yearStr, aYear)) {
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return DigitSubStringToNumber(aValue, endOfYearOffset + 2, 2, aWeek) &&
 | 
						|
         *aWeek > 0 && *aWeek <= MaximumWeekInYear(*aYear);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
bool HTMLInputElement::ParseDate(const nsAString& aValue, uint32_t* aYear,
 | 
						|
                                 uint32_t* aMonth, uint32_t* aDay) const {
 | 
						|
  /*
 | 
						|
   * Parse the year, month, day values out a date string formatted as
 | 
						|
   * yyyy-mm-dd. -The year must be 4 or more digits long, and year > 0 -The
 | 
						|
   * month must be exactly 2 digits long, and 01 <= month <= 12 -The day must be
 | 
						|
   * exactly 2 digit long, and 01 <= day <= maxday Where maxday is the number of
 | 
						|
   * days in the month 'month' and year 'year'
 | 
						|
   */
 | 
						|
  if (aValue.Length() < 10) {
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  uint32_t endOfMonthOffset = aValue.Length() - 3;
 | 
						|
  if (aValue[endOfMonthOffset] != '-') {
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  const nsAString& yearMonthStr = Substring(aValue, 0, endOfMonthOffset);
 | 
						|
  if (!ParseMonth(yearMonthStr, aYear, aMonth)) {
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return DigitSubStringToNumber(aValue, endOfMonthOffset + 1, 2, aDay) &&
 | 
						|
         *aDay > 0 && *aDay <= NumberOfDaysInMonth(*aMonth, *aYear);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
bool HTMLInputElement::ParseDateTimeLocal(const nsAString& aValue,
 | 
						|
                                          uint32_t* aYear, uint32_t* aMonth,
 | 
						|
                                          uint32_t* aDay,
 | 
						|
                                          uint32_t* aTime) const {
 | 
						|
  // Parse the year, month, day and time values out a string formatted as
 | 
						|
  // 'yyyy-mm-ddThh:mm[:ss.s] or 'yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm[:ss.s]', where fractions of
 | 
						|
  // seconds can be 1 to 3 digits.
 | 
						|
  // The minimum length allowed is 16, which is of the form 'yyyy-mm-ddThh:mm'
 | 
						|
  // or 'yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm'.
 | 
						|
  if (aValue.Length() < 16) {
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  int32_t sepIndex = aValue.FindChar('T');
 | 
						|
  if (sepIndex == -1) {
 | 
						|
    sepIndex = aValue.FindChar(' ');
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    if (sepIndex == -1) {
 | 
						|
      return false;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  const nsAString& dateStr = Substring(aValue, 0, sepIndex);
 | 
						|
  if (!ParseDate(dateStr, aYear, aMonth, aDay)) {
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  const nsAString& timeStr =
 | 
						|
      Substring(aValue, sepIndex + 1, aValue.Length() - sepIndex + 1);
 | 
						|
  if (!ParseTime(timeStr, aTime)) {
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return true;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::NormalizeDateTimeLocal(nsAString& aValue) const {
 | 
						|
  if (aValue.IsEmpty()) {
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Use 'T' as the separator between date string and time string.
 | 
						|
  int32_t sepIndex = aValue.FindChar(' ');
 | 
						|
  if (sepIndex != -1) {
 | 
						|
    aValue.ReplaceLiteral(sepIndex, 1, u"T");
 | 
						|
  } else {
 | 
						|
    sepIndex = aValue.FindChar('T');
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Time expressed as the shortest possible string, which is hh:mm.
 | 
						|
  if ((aValue.Length() - sepIndex) == 6) {
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Fractions of seconds part is optional, ommit it if it's 0.
 | 
						|
  if ((aValue.Length() - sepIndex) > 9) {
 | 
						|
    const uint32_t millisecSepIndex = sepIndex + 9;
 | 
						|
    uint32_t milliseconds;
 | 
						|
    if (!DigitSubStringToNumber(aValue, millisecSepIndex + 1,
 | 
						|
                                aValue.Length() - (millisecSepIndex + 1),
 | 
						|
                                &milliseconds)) {
 | 
						|
      return;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    if (milliseconds != 0) {
 | 
						|
      return;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    aValue.Cut(millisecSepIndex, aValue.Length() - millisecSepIndex);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Seconds part is optional, ommit it if it's 0.
 | 
						|
  const uint32_t secondSepIndex = sepIndex + 6;
 | 
						|
  uint32_t seconds;
 | 
						|
  if (!DigitSubStringToNumber(aValue, secondSepIndex + 1,
 | 
						|
                              aValue.Length() - (secondSepIndex + 1),
 | 
						|
                              &seconds)) {
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (seconds != 0) {
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  aValue.Cut(secondSepIndex, aValue.Length() - secondSepIndex);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
double HTMLInputElement::DaysSinceEpochFromWeek(uint32_t aYear,
 | 
						|
                                                uint32_t aWeek) const {
 | 
						|
  double days = JS::DayFromYear(aYear) + (aWeek - 1) * 7;
 | 
						|
  uint32_t dayOneIsoWeekday = DayOfWeek(aYear, 1, 1, true);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // If day one of that year is on/before Thursday, we should subtract the
 | 
						|
  // days that belong to last year in our first week, otherwise, our first
 | 
						|
  // days belong to last year's last week, and we should add those days
 | 
						|
  // back.
 | 
						|
  if (dayOneIsoWeekday <= 4) {
 | 
						|
    days -= (dayOneIsoWeekday - 1);
 | 
						|
  } else {
 | 
						|
    days += (7 - dayOneIsoWeekday + 1);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return days;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
uint32_t HTMLInputElement::NumberOfDaysInMonth(uint32_t aMonth,
 | 
						|
                                               uint32_t aYear) const {
 | 
						|
  /*
 | 
						|
   * Returns the number of days in a month.
 | 
						|
   * Months that are |longMonths| always have 31 days.
 | 
						|
   * Months that are not |longMonths| have 30 days except February (month 2).
 | 
						|
   * February has 29 days during leap years which are years that are divisible
 | 
						|
   * by 400. or divisible by 100 and 4. February has 28 days otherwise.
 | 
						|
   */
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  static const bool longMonths[] = {true, false, true,  false, true,  false,
 | 
						|
                                    true, true,  false, true,  false, true};
 | 
						|
  MOZ_ASSERT(aMonth <= 12 && aMonth > 0);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (longMonths[aMonth - 1]) {
 | 
						|
    return 31;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (aMonth != 2) {
 | 
						|
    return 30;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return IsLeapYear(aYear) ? 29 : 28;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* static */
 | 
						|
bool HTMLInputElement::DigitSubStringToNumber(const nsAString& aStr,
 | 
						|
                                              uint32_t aStart, uint32_t aLen,
 | 
						|
                                              uint32_t* aRetVal) {
 | 
						|
  MOZ_ASSERT(aStr.Length() > (aStart + aLen - 1));
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  for (uint32_t offset = 0; offset < aLen; ++offset) {
 | 
						|
    if (!IsAsciiDigit(aStr[aStart + offset])) {
 | 
						|
      return false;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  nsresult ec;
 | 
						|
  *aRetVal = static_cast<uint32_t>(
 | 
						|
      PromiseFlatString(Substring(aStr, aStart, aLen)).ToInteger(&ec));
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return NS_SUCCEEDED(ec);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
bool HTMLInputElement::IsValidTime(const nsAString& aValue) const {
 | 
						|
  return ParseTime(aValue, nullptr);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* static */
 | 
						|
bool HTMLInputElement::ParseTime(const nsAString& aValue, uint32_t* aResult) {
 | 
						|
  /* The string must have the following parts:
 | 
						|
   * - HOURS: two digits, value being in [0, 23];
 | 
						|
   * - Colon (:);
 | 
						|
   * - MINUTES: two digits, value being in [0, 59];
 | 
						|
   * - Optional:
 | 
						|
   *   - Colon (:);
 | 
						|
   *   - SECONDS: two digits, value being in [0, 59];
 | 
						|
   *   - Optional:
 | 
						|
   *     - DOT (.);
 | 
						|
   *     - FRACTIONAL SECONDS: one to three digits, no value range.
 | 
						|
   */
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // The following format is the shorter one allowed: "HH:MM".
 | 
						|
  if (aValue.Length() < 5) {
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  uint32_t hours;
 | 
						|
  if (!DigitSubStringToNumber(aValue, 0, 2, &hours) || hours > 23) {
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Hours/minutes separator.
 | 
						|
  if (aValue[2] != ':') {
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  uint32_t minutes;
 | 
						|
  if (!DigitSubStringToNumber(aValue, 3, 2, &minutes) || minutes > 59) {
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (aValue.Length() == 5) {
 | 
						|
    if (aResult) {
 | 
						|
      *aResult = ((hours * 60) + minutes) * 60000;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    return true;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // The following format is the next shorter one: "HH:MM:SS".
 | 
						|
  if (aValue.Length() < 8 || aValue[5] != ':') {
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  uint32_t seconds;
 | 
						|
  if (!DigitSubStringToNumber(aValue, 6, 2, &seconds) || seconds > 59) {
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (aValue.Length() == 8) {
 | 
						|
    if (aResult) {
 | 
						|
      *aResult = (((hours * 60) + minutes) * 60 + seconds) * 1000;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    return true;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // The string must follow this format now: "HH:MM:SS.{s,ss,sss}".
 | 
						|
  // There can be 1 to 3 digits for the fractions of seconds.
 | 
						|
  if (aValue.Length() == 9 || aValue.Length() > 12 || aValue[8] != '.') {
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  uint32_t fractionsSeconds;
 | 
						|
  if (!DigitSubStringToNumber(aValue, 9, aValue.Length() - 9,
 | 
						|
                              &fractionsSeconds)) {
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (aResult) {
 | 
						|
    *aResult = (((hours * 60) + minutes) * 60 + seconds) * 1000 +
 | 
						|
               // NOTE: there is 10.0 instead of 10 and static_cast<int> because
 | 
						|
               // some old [and stupid] compilers can't just do the right thing.
 | 
						|
               fractionsSeconds *
 | 
						|
                   pow(10.0, static_cast<int>(3 - (aValue.Length() - 9)));
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return true;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/* static */
 | 
						|
bool HTMLInputElement::IsDateTimeTypeSupported(
 | 
						|
    FormControlType aDateTimeInputType) {
 | 
						|
  switch (aDateTimeInputType) {
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputDate:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputTime:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputDatetimeLocal:
 | 
						|
      return true;
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputMonth:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputWeek:
 | 
						|
      return StaticPrefs::dom_forms_datetime_others();
 | 
						|
    default:
 | 
						|
      return false;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::GetLastInteractiveValue(nsAString& aValue) {
 | 
						|
  if (mLastValueChangeWasInteractive) {
 | 
						|
    return GetValue(aValue, CallerType::System);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  if (TextControlState* state = GetEditorState()) {
 | 
						|
    return aValue.Assign(
 | 
						|
        state->LastInteractiveValueIfLastChangeWasNonInteractive());
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  aValue.Truncate();
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
bool HTMLInputElement::ParseAttribute(int32_t aNamespaceID, nsAtom* aAttribute,
 | 
						|
                                      const nsAString& aValue,
 | 
						|
                                      nsIPrincipal* aMaybeScriptedPrincipal,
 | 
						|
                                      nsAttrValue& aResult) {
 | 
						|
  // We can't make these static_asserts because kInputDefaultType and
 | 
						|
  // kInputTypeTable aren't constexpr.
 | 
						|
  MOZ_ASSERT(
 | 
						|
      FormControlType(kInputDefaultType->value) == FormControlType::InputText,
 | 
						|
      "Someone forgot to update kInputDefaultType when adding a new "
 | 
						|
      "input type.");
 | 
						|
  MOZ_ASSERT(kInputTypeTable[ArrayLength(kInputTypeTable) - 1].tag == nullptr,
 | 
						|
             "Last entry in the table must be the nullptr guard");
 | 
						|
  MOZ_ASSERT(FormControlType(
 | 
						|
                 kInputTypeTable[ArrayLength(kInputTypeTable) - 2].value) ==
 | 
						|
                 FormControlType::InputText,
 | 
						|
             "Next to last entry in the table must be the \"text\" entry");
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (aNamespaceID == kNameSpaceID_None) {
 | 
						|
    if (aAttribute == nsGkAtoms::type) {
 | 
						|
      aResult.ParseEnumValue(aValue, kInputTypeTable, false, kInputDefaultType);
 | 
						|
      auto newType = FormControlType(aResult.GetEnumValue());
 | 
						|
      if (IsDateTimeInputType(newType) && !IsDateTimeTypeSupported(newType)) {
 | 
						|
        // There's no public way to set an nsAttrValue to an enum value, but we
 | 
						|
        // can just re-parse with a table that doesn't have any types other than
 | 
						|
        // "text" in it.
 | 
						|
        aResult.ParseEnumValue(aValue, kInputDefaultType, false,
 | 
						|
                               kInputDefaultType);
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      return true;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    if (aAttribute == nsGkAtoms::width) {
 | 
						|
      return aResult.ParseHTMLDimension(aValue);
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    if (aAttribute == nsGkAtoms::height) {
 | 
						|
      return aResult.ParseHTMLDimension(aValue);
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    if (aAttribute == nsGkAtoms::maxlength) {
 | 
						|
      return aResult.ParseNonNegativeIntValue(aValue);
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    if (aAttribute == nsGkAtoms::minlength) {
 | 
						|
      return aResult.ParseNonNegativeIntValue(aValue);
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    if (aAttribute == nsGkAtoms::size) {
 | 
						|
      return aResult.ParsePositiveIntValue(aValue);
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    if (aAttribute == nsGkAtoms::align) {
 | 
						|
      return ParseAlignValue(aValue, aResult);
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    if (aAttribute == nsGkAtoms::formmethod) {
 | 
						|
      return aResult.ParseEnumValue(aValue, kFormMethodTable, false);
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    if (aAttribute == nsGkAtoms::formenctype) {
 | 
						|
      return aResult.ParseEnumValue(aValue, kFormEnctypeTable, false);
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    if (aAttribute == nsGkAtoms::autocomplete) {
 | 
						|
      aResult.ParseAtomArray(aValue);
 | 
						|
      return true;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    if (aAttribute == nsGkAtoms::capture) {
 | 
						|
      return aResult.ParseEnumValue(aValue, kCaptureTable, false,
 | 
						|
                                    kCaptureDefault);
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    if (ParseImageAttribute(aAttribute, aValue, aResult)) {
 | 
						|
      // We have to call |ParseImageAttribute| unconditionally since we
 | 
						|
      // don't know if we're going to have a type="image" attribute yet,
 | 
						|
      // (or could have it set dynamically in the future).  See bug
 | 
						|
      // 214077.
 | 
						|
      return true;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return TextControlElement::ParseAttribute(aNamespaceID, aAttribute, aValue,
 | 
						|
                                            aMaybeScriptedPrincipal, aResult);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::ImageInputMapAttributesIntoRule(
 | 
						|
    MappedDeclarationsBuilder& aBuilder) {
 | 
						|
  nsGenericHTMLFormControlElementWithState::MapImageBorderAttributeInto(
 | 
						|
      aBuilder);
 | 
						|
  nsGenericHTMLFormControlElementWithState::MapImageMarginAttributeInto(
 | 
						|
      aBuilder);
 | 
						|
  nsGenericHTMLFormControlElementWithState::MapImageSizeAttributesInto(
 | 
						|
      aBuilder, MapAspectRatio::Yes);
 | 
						|
  // Images treat align as "float"
 | 
						|
  nsGenericHTMLFormControlElementWithState::MapImageAlignAttributeInto(
 | 
						|
      aBuilder);
 | 
						|
  nsGenericHTMLFormControlElementWithState::MapCommonAttributesInto(aBuilder);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
nsChangeHint HTMLInputElement::GetAttributeChangeHint(const nsAtom* aAttribute,
 | 
						|
                                                      int32_t aModType) const {
 | 
						|
  nsChangeHint retval =
 | 
						|
      nsGenericHTMLFormControlElementWithState::GetAttributeChangeHint(
 | 
						|
          aAttribute, aModType);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  const bool isAdditionOrRemoval =
 | 
						|
      aModType == MutationEvent_Binding::ADDITION ||
 | 
						|
      aModType == MutationEvent_Binding::REMOVAL;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  const bool reconstruct = [&] {
 | 
						|
    if (aAttribute == nsGkAtoms::type) {
 | 
						|
      return true;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    if (PlaceholderApplies() && aAttribute == nsGkAtoms::placeholder &&
 | 
						|
        isAdditionOrRemoval) {
 | 
						|
      // We need to re-create our placeholder text.
 | 
						|
      return true;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    if (mType == FormControlType::InputFile &&
 | 
						|
        aAttribute == nsGkAtoms::webkitdirectory) {
 | 
						|
      // The presence or absence of the 'directory' attribute determines what
 | 
						|
      // value we show in the file label when empty, via GetDisplayFileName.
 | 
						|
      return true;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    if (mType == FormControlType::InputImage && isAdditionOrRemoval &&
 | 
						|
        (aAttribute == nsGkAtoms::alt || aAttribute == nsGkAtoms::value)) {
 | 
						|
      // We might need to rebuild our alt text.  Just go ahead and
 | 
						|
      // reconstruct our frame.  This should be quite rare..
 | 
						|
      return true;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
  }();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (reconstruct) {
 | 
						|
    retval |= nsChangeHint_ReconstructFrame;
 | 
						|
  } else if (aAttribute == nsGkAtoms::value) {
 | 
						|
    retval |= NS_STYLE_HINT_REFLOW;
 | 
						|
  } else if (aAttribute == nsGkAtoms::size && IsSingleLineTextControl(false)) {
 | 
						|
    retval |= NS_STYLE_HINT_REFLOW;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return retval;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
NS_IMETHODIMP_(bool)
 | 
						|
HTMLInputElement::IsAttributeMapped(const nsAtom* aAttribute) const {
 | 
						|
  static const MappedAttributeEntry attributes[] = {
 | 
						|
      {nsGkAtoms::align},
 | 
						|
      {nullptr},
 | 
						|
  };
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  static const MappedAttributeEntry* const map[] = {
 | 
						|
      attributes,
 | 
						|
      sCommonAttributeMap,
 | 
						|
      sImageMarginSizeAttributeMap,
 | 
						|
      sImageBorderAttributeMap,
 | 
						|
  };
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return FindAttributeDependence(aAttribute, map);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
nsMapRuleToAttributesFunc HTMLInputElement::GetAttributeMappingFunction()
 | 
						|
    const {
 | 
						|
  // GetAttributeChangeHint guarantees that changes to mType will trigger a
 | 
						|
  // reframe, and we update the mapping function in our mapped attrs when our
 | 
						|
  // type changes, so it's safe to condition our attribute mapping function on
 | 
						|
  // mType.
 | 
						|
  if (mType == FormControlType::InputImage) {
 | 
						|
    return &ImageInputMapAttributesIntoRule;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return &MapCommonAttributesInto;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
// Directory picking methods:
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
already_AddRefed<Promise> HTMLInputElement::GetFilesAndDirectories(
 | 
						|
    ErrorResult& aRv) {
 | 
						|
  if (mType != FormControlType::InputFile) {
 | 
						|
    aRv.Throw(NS_ERROR_DOM_INVALID_STATE_ERR);
 | 
						|
    return nullptr;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  nsCOMPtr<nsIGlobalObject> global = OwnerDoc()->GetScopeObject();
 | 
						|
  MOZ_ASSERT(global);
 | 
						|
  if (!global) {
 | 
						|
    return nullptr;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  RefPtr<Promise> p = Promise::Create(global, aRv);
 | 
						|
  if (aRv.Failed()) {
 | 
						|
    return nullptr;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  const nsTArray<OwningFileOrDirectory>& filesAndDirs =
 | 
						|
      GetFilesOrDirectoriesInternal();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  Sequence<OwningFileOrDirectory> filesAndDirsSeq;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (!filesAndDirsSeq.SetLength(filesAndDirs.Length(), fallible)) {
 | 
						|
    p->MaybeReject(NS_ERROR_OUT_OF_MEMORY);
 | 
						|
    return p.forget();
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  for (uint32_t i = 0; i < filesAndDirs.Length(); ++i) {
 | 
						|
    if (filesAndDirs[i].IsDirectory()) {
 | 
						|
      RefPtr<Directory> directory = filesAndDirs[i].GetAsDirectory();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      // In future we could refactor SetFilePickerFiltersFromAccept to return a
 | 
						|
      // semicolon separated list of file extensions and include that in the
 | 
						|
      // filter string passed here.
 | 
						|
      directory->SetContentFilters(u"filter-out-sensitive"_ns);
 | 
						|
      filesAndDirsSeq[i].SetAsDirectory() = directory;
 | 
						|
    } else {
 | 
						|
      MOZ_ASSERT(filesAndDirs[i].IsFile());
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      // This file was directly selected by the user, so don't filter it.
 | 
						|
      filesAndDirsSeq[i].SetAsFile() = filesAndDirs[i].GetAsFile();
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  p->MaybeResolve(filesAndDirsSeq);
 | 
						|
  return p.forget();
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
// Controllers Methods
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
nsIControllers* HTMLInputElement::GetControllers(ErrorResult& aRv) {
 | 
						|
  // XXX: what about type "file"?
 | 
						|
  if (IsSingleLineTextControl(false)) {
 | 
						|
    if (!mControllers) {
 | 
						|
      mControllers = new nsXULControllers();
 | 
						|
      if (!mControllers) {
 | 
						|
        aRv.Throw(NS_ERROR_FAILURE);
 | 
						|
        return nullptr;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      RefPtr<nsBaseCommandController> commandController =
 | 
						|
          nsBaseCommandController::CreateEditorController();
 | 
						|
      if (!commandController) {
 | 
						|
        aRv.Throw(NS_ERROR_FAILURE);
 | 
						|
        return nullptr;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      mControllers->AppendController(commandController);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      commandController = nsBaseCommandController::CreateEditingController();
 | 
						|
      if (!commandController) {
 | 
						|
        aRv.Throw(NS_ERROR_FAILURE);
 | 
						|
        return nullptr;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      mControllers->AppendController(commandController);
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return mControllers;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
nsresult HTMLInputElement::GetControllers(nsIControllers** aResult) {
 | 
						|
  NS_ENSURE_ARG_POINTER(aResult);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  ErrorResult rv;
 | 
						|
  RefPtr<nsIControllers> controller = GetControllers(rv);
 | 
						|
  controller.forget(aResult);
 | 
						|
  return rv.StealNSResult();
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
int32_t HTMLInputElement::InputTextLength(CallerType aCallerType) {
 | 
						|
  nsAutoString val;
 | 
						|
  GetValue(val, aCallerType);
 | 
						|
  return val.Length();
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::SetSelectionRange(uint32_t aSelectionStart,
 | 
						|
                                         uint32_t aSelectionEnd,
 | 
						|
                                         const Optional<nsAString>& aDirection,
 | 
						|
                                         ErrorResult& aRv) {
 | 
						|
  if (!SupportsTextSelection()) {
 | 
						|
    aRv.Throw(NS_ERROR_DOM_INVALID_STATE_ERR);
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  TextControlState* state = GetEditorState();
 | 
						|
  MOZ_ASSERT(state, "SupportsTextSelection() returned true!");
 | 
						|
  state->SetSelectionRange(aSelectionStart, aSelectionEnd, aDirection, aRv);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::SetRangeText(const nsAString& aReplacement,
 | 
						|
                                    ErrorResult& aRv) {
 | 
						|
  if (!SupportsTextSelection()) {
 | 
						|
    aRv.Throw(NS_ERROR_DOM_INVALID_STATE_ERR);
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  TextControlState* state = GetEditorState();
 | 
						|
  MOZ_ASSERT(state, "SupportsTextSelection() returned true!");
 | 
						|
  state->SetRangeText(aReplacement, aRv);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::SetRangeText(const nsAString& aReplacement,
 | 
						|
                                    uint32_t aStart, uint32_t aEnd,
 | 
						|
                                    SelectionMode aSelectMode,
 | 
						|
                                    ErrorResult& aRv) {
 | 
						|
  if (!SupportsTextSelection()) {
 | 
						|
    aRv.Throw(NS_ERROR_DOM_INVALID_STATE_ERR);
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  TextControlState* state = GetEditorState();
 | 
						|
  MOZ_ASSERT(state, "SupportsTextSelection() returned true!");
 | 
						|
  state->SetRangeText(aReplacement, aStart, aEnd, aSelectMode, aRv);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::GetValueFromSetRangeText(nsAString& aValue) {
 | 
						|
  GetNonFileValueInternal(aValue);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
nsresult HTMLInputElement::SetValueFromSetRangeText(const nsAString& aValue) {
 | 
						|
  return SetValueInternal(aValue, {ValueSetterOption::ByContentAPI,
 | 
						|
                                   ValueSetterOption::BySetRangeTextAPI,
 | 
						|
                                   ValueSetterOption::SetValueChanged});
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
Nullable<uint32_t> HTMLInputElement::GetSelectionStart(ErrorResult& aRv) {
 | 
						|
  if (!SupportsTextSelection()) {
 | 
						|
    return Nullable<uint32_t>();
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  uint32_t selStart = GetSelectionStartIgnoringType(aRv);
 | 
						|
  if (aRv.Failed()) {
 | 
						|
    return Nullable<uint32_t>();
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return Nullable<uint32_t>(selStart);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
uint32_t HTMLInputElement::GetSelectionStartIgnoringType(ErrorResult& aRv) {
 | 
						|
  uint32_t selEnd, selStart;
 | 
						|
  GetSelectionRange(&selStart, &selEnd, aRv);
 | 
						|
  return selStart;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::SetSelectionStart(
 | 
						|
    const Nullable<uint32_t>& aSelectionStart, ErrorResult& aRv) {
 | 
						|
  if (!SupportsTextSelection()) {
 | 
						|
    aRv.Throw(NS_ERROR_DOM_INVALID_STATE_ERR);
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  TextControlState* state = GetEditorState();
 | 
						|
  MOZ_ASSERT(state, "SupportsTextSelection() returned true!");
 | 
						|
  state->SetSelectionStart(aSelectionStart, aRv);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
Nullable<uint32_t> HTMLInputElement::GetSelectionEnd(ErrorResult& aRv) {
 | 
						|
  if (!SupportsTextSelection()) {
 | 
						|
    return Nullable<uint32_t>();
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  uint32_t selEnd = GetSelectionEndIgnoringType(aRv);
 | 
						|
  if (aRv.Failed()) {
 | 
						|
    return Nullable<uint32_t>();
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return Nullable<uint32_t>(selEnd);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
uint32_t HTMLInputElement::GetSelectionEndIgnoringType(ErrorResult& aRv) {
 | 
						|
  uint32_t selEnd, selStart;
 | 
						|
  GetSelectionRange(&selStart, &selEnd, aRv);
 | 
						|
  return selEnd;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::SetSelectionEnd(const Nullable<uint32_t>& aSelectionEnd,
 | 
						|
                                       ErrorResult& aRv) {
 | 
						|
  if (!SupportsTextSelection()) {
 | 
						|
    aRv.Throw(NS_ERROR_DOM_INVALID_STATE_ERR);
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  TextControlState* state = GetEditorState();
 | 
						|
  MOZ_ASSERT(state, "SupportsTextSelection() returned true!");
 | 
						|
  state->SetSelectionEnd(aSelectionEnd, aRv);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::GetSelectionRange(uint32_t* aSelectionStart,
 | 
						|
                                         uint32_t* aSelectionEnd,
 | 
						|
                                         ErrorResult& aRv) {
 | 
						|
  TextControlState* state = GetEditorState();
 | 
						|
  if (!state) {
 | 
						|
    // Not a text control.
 | 
						|
    aRv.Throw(NS_ERROR_UNEXPECTED);
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  state->GetSelectionRange(aSelectionStart, aSelectionEnd, aRv);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::GetSelectionDirection(nsAString& aDirection,
 | 
						|
                                             ErrorResult& aRv) {
 | 
						|
  if (!SupportsTextSelection()) {
 | 
						|
    aDirection.SetIsVoid(true);
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  TextControlState* state = GetEditorState();
 | 
						|
  MOZ_ASSERT(state, "SupportsTextSelection came back true!");
 | 
						|
  state->GetSelectionDirectionString(aDirection, aRv);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::SetSelectionDirection(const nsAString& aDirection,
 | 
						|
                                             ErrorResult& aRv) {
 | 
						|
  if (!SupportsTextSelection()) {
 | 
						|
    aRv.Throw(NS_ERROR_DOM_INVALID_STATE_ERR);
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  TextControlState* state = GetEditorState();
 | 
						|
  MOZ_ASSERT(state, "SupportsTextSelection came back true!");
 | 
						|
  state->SetSelectionDirection(aDirection, aRv);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
// https://html.spec.whatwg.org/multipage/input.html#dom-input-showpicker
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::ShowPicker(ErrorResult& aRv) {
 | 
						|
  // Step 1. If this is not mutable, then throw an "InvalidStateError"
 | 
						|
  // DOMException.
 | 
						|
  if (!IsMutable()) {
 | 
						|
    return aRv.ThrowInvalidStateError(
 | 
						|
        "This input is either disabled or readonly.");
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Step 2. If this's relevant settings object's origin is not same origin with
 | 
						|
  // this's relevant settings object's top-level origin, and this's type
 | 
						|
  // attribute is not in the File Upload state or Color state, then throw a
 | 
						|
  // "SecurityError" DOMException.
 | 
						|
  if (mType != FormControlType::InputFile &&
 | 
						|
      mType != FormControlType::InputColor) {
 | 
						|
    nsPIDOMWindowInner* window = OwnerDoc()->GetInnerWindow();
 | 
						|
    WindowGlobalChild* windowGlobalChild =
 | 
						|
        window ? window->GetWindowGlobalChild() : nullptr;
 | 
						|
    if (!windowGlobalChild || !windowGlobalChild->SameOriginWithTop()) {
 | 
						|
      return aRv.ThrowSecurityError(
 | 
						|
          "Call was blocked because the current origin isn't same-origin with "
 | 
						|
          "top.");
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Step 3. If this's relevant global object does not have transient
 | 
						|
  // activation, then throw a "NotAllowedError" DOMException.
 | 
						|
  if (!OwnerDoc()->HasValidTransientUserGestureActivation()) {
 | 
						|
    return aRv.ThrowNotAllowedError(
 | 
						|
        "Call was blocked due to lack of user activation.");
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Step 4. Show the picker, if applicable, for this.
 | 
						|
  //
 | 
						|
  // https://html.spec.whatwg.org/multipage/input.html#show-the-picker,-if-applicable
 | 
						|
  // To show the picker, if applicable for an input element element:
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Step 1. Assert: element's relevant global object has transient activation.
 | 
						|
  // Step 2. If element is not mutable, then return.
 | 
						|
  // (See above.)
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Step 3. Consume user activation given element's relevant global object.
 | 
						|
  // InitFilePicker() and InitColorPicker() consume it themselves,
 | 
						|
  // so only consume in this function if not those.
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Step 4. If element's type attribute is in the File Upload state, then run
 | 
						|
  // these steps in parallel:
 | 
						|
  if (mType == FormControlType::InputFile) {
 | 
						|
    FilePickerType type = FILE_PICKER_FILE;
 | 
						|
    if (StaticPrefs::dom_webkitBlink_dirPicker_enabled() &&
 | 
						|
        HasAttr(nsGkAtoms::webkitdirectory)) {
 | 
						|
      type = FILE_PICKER_DIRECTORY;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    InitFilePicker(type);
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Step 5. Otherwise, the user agent should show any relevant user interface
 | 
						|
  // for selecting a value for element, in the way it normally would when the
 | 
						|
  // user interacts with the control
 | 
						|
  if (mType == FormControlType::InputColor) {
 | 
						|
    InitColorPicker();
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // See Step 3.
 | 
						|
  OwnerDoc()->ConsumeTransientUserGestureActivation();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (!IsInComposedDoc()) {
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (IsDateTimeTypeSupported(mType)) {
 | 
						|
    if (CreatesDateTimeWidget()) {
 | 
						|
      if (RefPtr<Element> dateTimeBoxElement = GetDateTimeBoxElement()) {
 | 
						|
        // Event is dispatched to closed-shadow tree and doesn't bubble.
 | 
						|
        RefPtr<Document> doc = dateTimeBoxElement->OwnerDoc();
 | 
						|
        nsContentUtils::DispatchTrustedEvent(doc, dateTimeBoxElement,
 | 
						|
                                             u"MozDateTimeShowPickerForJS"_ns,
 | 
						|
                                             CanBubble::eNo, Cancelable::eNo);
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    } else {
 | 
						|
      DateTimeValue value;
 | 
						|
      GetDateTimeInputBoxValue(value);
 | 
						|
      OpenDateTimePicker(value);
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
#ifdef ACCESSIBILITY
 | 
						|
/*static*/ nsresult FireEventForAccessibility(HTMLInputElement* aTarget,
 | 
						|
                                              EventMessage aEventMessage) {
 | 
						|
  Element* element = static_cast<Element*>(aTarget);
 | 
						|
  return nsContentUtils::DispatchTrustedEvent<WidgetEvent>(
 | 
						|
      element->OwnerDoc(), element, aEventMessage, CanBubble::eYes,
 | 
						|
      Cancelable::eYes);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
#endif
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::UpdateApzAwareFlag() {
 | 
						|
#if !defined(ANDROID) && !defined(XP_MACOSX)
 | 
						|
  if (mType == FormControlType::InputNumber ||
 | 
						|
      mType == FormControlType::InputRange) {
 | 
						|
    SetMayBeApzAware();
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
#endif
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
nsresult HTMLInputElement::SetDefaultValueAsValue() {
 | 
						|
  NS_ASSERTION(GetValueMode() == VALUE_MODE_VALUE,
 | 
						|
               "GetValueMode() should return VALUE_MODE_VALUE!");
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // The element has a content attribute value different from it's value when
 | 
						|
  // it's in the value mode value.
 | 
						|
  nsAutoString resetVal;
 | 
						|
  GetDefaultValue(resetVal);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // SetValueInternal is going to sanitize the value.
 | 
						|
  // TODO(mbrodesser): sanitizing will only happen if `mDoneCreating` is true.
 | 
						|
  return SetValueInternal(resetVal, ValueSetterOption::ByInternalAPI);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
// https://html.spec.whatwg.org/#auto-directionality
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::SetAutoDirectionality(bool aNotify,
 | 
						|
                                             const nsAString* aKnownValue) {
 | 
						|
  if (!IsAutoDirectionalityAssociated()) {
 | 
						|
    return SetDirectionality(Directionality::Ltr, aNotify);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  nsAutoString value;
 | 
						|
  if (!aKnownValue) {
 | 
						|
    // It's unclear if per spec we should use the sanitized or unsanitized
 | 
						|
    // value to set the directionality, but aKnownValue is unsanitized, so be
 | 
						|
    // consistent. Using what the user is seeing to determine directionality
 | 
						|
    // instead of the sanitized (empty if invalid) value probably makes more
 | 
						|
    // sense.
 | 
						|
    GetValueInternal(value, CallerType::System);
 | 
						|
    aKnownValue = &value;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  SetDirectionalityFromValue(this, *aKnownValue, aNotify);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
NS_IMETHODIMP
 | 
						|
HTMLInputElement::Reset() {
 | 
						|
  // We should be able to reset all dirty flags regardless of the type.
 | 
						|
  SetCheckedChanged(false);
 | 
						|
  SetValueChanged(false);
 | 
						|
  SetLastValueChangeWasInteractive(false);
 | 
						|
  SetUserInteracted(false);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  switch (GetValueMode()) {
 | 
						|
    case VALUE_MODE_VALUE: {
 | 
						|
      nsresult result = SetDefaultValueAsValue();
 | 
						|
      if (CreatesDateTimeWidget()) {
 | 
						|
        // mFocusedValue has to be set here, so that `FireChangeEventIfNeeded`
 | 
						|
        // can fire a change event if necessary.
 | 
						|
        GetValue(mFocusedValue, CallerType::System);
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      return result;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    case VALUE_MODE_DEFAULT_ON:
 | 
						|
      DoSetChecked(DefaultChecked(), true, false);
 | 
						|
      return NS_OK;
 | 
						|
    case VALUE_MODE_FILENAME:
 | 
						|
      ClearFiles(false);
 | 
						|
      return NS_OK;
 | 
						|
    case VALUE_MODE_DEFAULT:
 | 
						|
    default:
 | 
						|
      return NS_OK;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
NS_IMETHODIMP
 | 
						|
HTMLInputElement::SubmitNamesValues(FormData* aFormData) {
 | 
						|
  // For type=reset, and type=button, we just never submit, period.
 | 
						|
  // For type=image and type=button, we only submit if we were the button
 | 
						|
  // pressed
 | 
						|
  // For type=radio and type=checkbox, we only submit if checked=true
 | 
						|
  if (mType == FormControlType::InputReset ||
 | 
						|
      mType == FormControlType::InputButton ||
 | 
						|
      ((mType == FormControlType::InputSubmit ||
 | 
						|
        mType == FormControlType::InputImage) &&
 | 
						|
       aFormData->GetSubmitterElement() != this) ||
 | 
						|
      ((mType == FormControlType::InputRadio ||
 | 
						|
        mType == FormControlType::InputCheckbox) &&
 | 
						|
       !mChecked)) {
 | 
						|
    return NS_OK;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Get the name
 | 
						|
  nsAutoString name;
 | 
						|
  GetAttr(nsGkAtoms::name, name);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Submit .x, .y for input type=image
 | 
						|
  if (mType == FormControlType::InputImage) {
 | 
						|
    // Get a property set by the frame to find out where it was clicked.
 | 
						|
    const auto* lastClickedPoint =
 | 
						|
        static_cast<CSSIntPoint*>(GetProperty(nsGkAtoms::imageClickedPoint));
 | 
						|
    int32_t x, y;
 | 
						|
    if (lastClickedPoint) {
 | 
						|
      // Convert the values to strings for submission
 | 
						|
      x = lastClickedPoint->x;
 | 
						|
      y = lastClickedPoint->y;
 | 
						|
    } else {
 | 
						|
      x = y = 0;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    nsAutoString xVal, yVal;
 | 
						|
    xVal.AppendInt(x);
 | 
						|
    yVal.AppendInt(y);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    if (!name.IsEmpty()) {
 | 
						|
      aFormData->AddNameValuePair(name + u".x"_ns, xVal);
 | 
						|
      aFormData->AddNameValuePair(name + u".y"_ns, yVal);
 | 
						|
    } else {
 | 
						|
      // If the Image Element has no name, simply return x and y
 | 
						|
      // to Nav and IE compatibility.
 | 
						|
      aFormData->AddNameValuePair(u"x"_ns, xVal);
 | 
						|
      aFormData->AddNameValuePair(u"y"_ns, yVal);
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    return NS_OK;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // If name not there, don't submit
 | 
						|
  if (name.IsEmpty()) {
 | 
						|
    return NS_OK;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  //
 | 
						|
  // Submit file if its input type=file and this encoding method accepts files
 | 
						|
  //
 | 
						|
  if (mType == FormControlType::InputFile) {
 | 
						|
    // Submit files
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    const nsTArray<OwningFileOrDirectory>& files =
 | 
						|
        GetFilesOrDirectoriesInternal();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    if (files.IsEmpty()) {
 | 
						|
      NS_ENSURE_STATE(GetOwnerGlobal());
 | 
						|
      ErrorResult rv;
 | 
						|
      RefPtr<Blob> blob = Blob::CreateStringBlob(
 | 
						|
          GetOwnerGlobal(), ""_ns, u"application/octet-stream"_ns);
 | 
						|
      RefPtr<File> file = blob->ToFile(u""_ns, rv);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      if (!rv.Failed()) {
 | 
						|
        aFormData->AddNameBlobPair(name, file);
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      return rv.StealNSResult();
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    for (uint32_t i = 0; i < files.Length(); ++i) {
 | 
						|
      if (files[i].IsFile()) {
 | 
						|
        aFormData->AddNameBlobPair(name, files[i].GetAsFile());
 | 
						|
      } else {
 | 
						|
        MOZ_ASSERT(files[i].IsDirectory());
 | 
						|
        aFormData->AddNameDirectoryPair(name, files[i].GetAsDirectory());
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    return NS_OK;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (mType == FormControlType::InputHidden &&
 | 
						|
      name.LowerCaseEqualsLiteral("_charset_")) {
 | 
						|
    nsCString charset;
 | 
						|
    aFormData->GetCharset(charset);
 | 
						|
    return aFormData->AddNameValuePair(name, NS_ConvertASCIItoUTF16(charset));
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  //
 | 
						|
  // Submit name=value
 | 
						|
  //
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Get the value
 | 
						|
  nsAutoString value;
 | 
						|
  GetValue(value, CallerType::System);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (mType == FormControlType::InputSubmit && value.IsEmpty() &&
 | 
						|
      !HasAttr(nsGkAtoms::value)) {
 | 
						|
    // Get our default value, which is the same as our default label
 | 
						|
    nsAutoString defaultValue;
 | 
						|
    nsContentUtils::GetMaybeLocalizedString(nsContentUtils::eFORMS_PROPERTIES,
 | 
						|
                                            "Submit", OwnerDoc(), defaultValue);
 | 
						|
    value = defaultValue;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  const nsresult rv = aFormData->AddNameValuePair(name, value);
 | 
						|
  if (NS_FAILED(rv)) {
 | 
						|
    return rv;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Submit dirname=dir
 | 
						|
  if (IsAutoDirectionalityAssociated()) {
 | 
						|
    return SubmitDirnameDir(aFormData);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return NS_OK;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
static nsTArray<FileContentData> SaveFileContentData(
 | 
						|
    const nsTArray<OwningFileOrDirectory>& aArray) {
 | 
						|
  nsTArray<FileContentData> res(aArray.Length());
 | 
						|
  for (const auto& it : aArray) {
 | 
						|
    if (it.IsFile()) {
 | 
						|
      RefPtr<BlobImpl> impl = it.GetAsFile()->Impl();
 | 
						|
      res.AppendElement(std::move(impl));
 | 
						|
    } else {
 | 
						|
      MOZ_ASSERT(it.IsDirectory());
 | 
						|
      nsString fullPath;
 | 
						|
      nsresult rv = it.GetAsDirectory()->GetFullRealPath(fullPath);
 | 
						|
      if (NS_WARN_IF(NS_FAILED(rv))) {
 | 
						|
        continue;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      res.AppendElement(std::move(fullPath));
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return res;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::SaveState() {
 | 
						|
  PresState* state = nullptr;
 | 
						|
  switch (GetValueMode()) {
 | 
						|
    case VALUE_MODE_DEFAULT_ON:
 | 
						|
      if (mCheckedChanged) {
 | 
						|
        state = GetPrimaryPresState();
 | 
						|
        if (!state) {
 | 
						|
          return;
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        state->contentData() = CheckedContentData(mChecked);
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      break;
 | 
						|
    case VALUE_MODE_FILENAME:
 | 
						|
      if (!mFileData->mFilesOrDirectories.IsEmpty()) {
 | 
						|
        state = GetPrimaryPresState();
 | 
						|
        if (!state) {
 | 
						|
          return;
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
        state->contentData() =
 | 
						|
            SaveFileContentData(mFileData->mFilesOrDirectories);
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      break;
 | 
						|
    case VALUE_MODE_VALUE:
 | 
						|
    case VALUE_MODE_DEFAULT:
 | 
						|
      // VALUE_MODE_DEFAULT shouldn't have their value saved except 'hidden',
 | 
						|
      // mType should have never been FormControlType::InputPassword and value
 | 
						|
      // should have changed.
 | 
						|
      if ((GetValueMode() == VALUE_MODE_DEFAULT &&
 | 
						|
           mType != FormControlType::InputHidden) ||
 | 
						|
          mHasBeenTypePassword || !mValueChanged) {
 | 
						|
        break;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      state = GetPrimaryPresState();
 | 
						|
      if (!state) {
 | 
						|
        return;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      nsAutoString value;
 | 
						|
      GetValue(value, CallerType::System);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      if (!IsSingleLineTextControl(false) &&
 | 
						|
          NS_FAILED(nsLinebreakConverter::ConvertStringLineBreaks(
 | 
						|
              value, nsLinebreakConverter::eLinebreakPlatform,
 | 
						|
              nsLinebreakConverter::eLinebreakContent))) {
 | 
						|
        NS_ERROR("Converting linebreaks failed!");
 | 
						|
        return;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      state->contentData() =
 | 
						|
          TextContentData(value, mLastValueChangeWasInteractive);
 | 
						|
      break;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (mDisabledChanged) {
 | 
						|
    if (!state) {
 | 
						|
      state = GetPrimaryPresState();
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    if (state) {
 | 
						|
      // We do not want to save the real disabled state but the disabled
 | 
						|
      // attribute.
 | 
						|
      state->disabled() = HasAttr(nsGkAtoms::disabled);
 | 
						|
      state->disabledSet() = true;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::DoneCreatingElement() {
 | 
						|
  mDoneCreating = true;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  //
 | 
						|
  // Restore state as needed.  Note that disabled state applies to all control
 | 
						|
  // types.
 | 
						|
  //
 | 
						|
  bool restoredCheckedState = false;
 | 
						|
  if (!mInhibitRestoration) {
 | 
						|
    GenerateStateKey();
 | 
						|
    restoredCheckedState = RestoreFormControlState();
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  //
 | 
						|
  // If restore does not occur, we initialize .checked using the CHECKED
 | 
						|
  // property.
 | 
						|
  //
 | 
						|
  if (!restoredCheckedState && mShouldInitChecked) {
 | 
						|
    DoSetChecked(DefaultChecked(), false, false);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Sanitize the value and potentially set mFocusedValue.
 | 
						|
  if (GetValueMode() == VALUE_MODE_VALUE) {
 | 
						|
    nsAutoString value;
 | 
						|
    GetValue(value, CallerType::System);
 | 
						|
    // TODO: What should we do if SetValueInternal fails?  (The allocation
 | 
						|
    // may potentially be big, but most likely we've failed to allocate
 | 
						|
    // before the type change.)
 | 
						|
    SetValueInternal(value, ValueSetterOption::ByInternalAPI);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    if (CreatesDateTimeWidget()) {
 | 
						|
      // mFocusedValue has to be set here, so that `FireChangeEventIfNeeded` can
 | 
						|
      // fire a change event if necessary.
 | 
						|
      mFocusedValue = value;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  mShouldInitChecked = false;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::DestroyContent() {
 | 
						|
  nsImageLoadingContent::Destroy();
 | 
						|
  TextControlElement::DestroyContent();
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::UpdateValidityElementStates(bool aNotify) {
 | 
						|
  AutoStateChangeNotifier notifier(*this, aNotify);
 | 
						|
  RemoveStatesSilently(ElementState::VALIDITY_STATES);
 | 
						|
  if (!IsCandidateForConstraintValidation()) {
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  ElementState state;
 | 
						|
  if (IsValid()) {
 | 
						|
    state |= ElementState::VALID;
 | 
						|
    if (mUserInteracted) {
 | 
						|
      state |= ElementState::USER_VALID;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  } else {
 | 
						|
    state |= ElementState::INVALID;
 | 
						|
    if (mUserInteracted) {
 | 
						|
      state |= ElementState::USER_INVALID;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  AddStatesSilently(state);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
static nsTArray<OwningFileOrDirectory> RestoreFileContentData(
 | 
						|
    nsPIDOMWindowInner* aWindow, const nsTArray<FileContentData>& aData) {
 | 
						|
  nsTArray<OwningFileOrDirectory> res(aData.Length());
 | 
						|
  for (const auto& it : aData) {
 | 
						|
    if (it.type() == FileContentData::TBlobImpl) {
 | 
						|
      if (!it.get_BlobImpl()) {
 | 
						|
        // Serialization failed, skip this file.
 | 
						|
        continue;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      RefPtr<File> file = File::Create(aWindow->AsGlobal(), it.get_BlobImpl());
 | 
						|
      if (NS_WARN_IF(!file)) {
 | 
						|
        continue;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      OwningFileOrDirectory* element = res.AppendElement();
 | 
						|
      element->SetAsFile() = file;
 | 
						|
    } else {
 | 
						|
      MOZ_ASSERT(it.type() == FileContentData::TnsString);
 | 
						|
      nsCOMPtr<nsIFile> file;
 | 
						|
      nsresult rv =
 | 
						|
          NS_NewLocalFile(it.get_nsString(), true, getter_AddRefs(file));
 | 
						|
      if (NS_WARN_IF(NS_FAILED(rv))) {
 | 
						|
        continue;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      RefPtr<Directory> directory =
 | 
						|
          Directory::Create(aWindow->AsGlobal(), file);
 | 
						|
      MOZ_ASSERT(directory);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      OwningFileOrDirectory* element = res.AppendElement();
 | 
						|
      element->SetAsDirectory() = directory;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return res;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
bool HTMLInputElement::RestoreState(PresState* aState) {
 | 
						|
  bool restoredCheckedState = false;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  const PresContentData& inputState = aState->contentData();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  switch (GetValueMode()) {
 | 
						|
    case VALUE_MODE_DEFAULT_ON:
 | 
						|
      if (inputState.type() == PresContentData::TCheckedContentData) {
 | 
						|
        restoredCheckedState = true;
 | 
						|
        bool checked = inputState.get_CheckedContentData().checked();
 | 
						|
        DoSetChecked(checked, true, true);
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      break;
 | 
						|
    case VALUE_MODE_FILENAME:
 | 
						|
      if (inputState.type() == PresContentData::TArrayOfFileContentData) {
 | 
						|
        nsPIDOMWindowInner* window = OwnerDoc()->GetInnerWindow();
 | 
						|
        if (window) {
 | 
						|
          nsTArray<OwningFileOrDirectory> array =
 | 
						|
              RestoreFileContentData(window, inputState);
 | 
						|
          SetFilesOrDirectories(array, true);
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      break;
 | 
						|
    case VALUE_MODE_VALUE:
 | 
						|
    case VALUE_MODE_DEFAULT:
 | 
						|
      if (GetValueMode() == VALUE_MODE_DEFAULT &&
 | 
						|
          mType != FormControlType::InputHidden) {
 | 
						|
        break;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      if (inputState.type() == PresContentData::TTextContentData) {
 | 
						|
        // TODO: What should we do if SetValueInternal fails?  (The allocation
 | 
						|
        // may potentially be big, but most likely we've failed to allocate
 | 
						|
        // before the type change.)
 | 
						|
        SetValueInternal(inputState.get_TextContentData().value(),
 | 
						|
                         ValueSetterOption::SetValueChanged);
 | 
						|
        if (inputState.get_TextContentData().lastValueChangeWasInteractive()) {
 | 
						|
          SetLastValueChangeWasInteractive(true);
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      break;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (aState->disabledSet() && !aState->disabled()) {
 | 
						|
    SetDisabled(false, IgnoreErrors());
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return restoredCheckedState;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
/*
 | 
						|
 * Radio group stuff
 | 
						|
 */
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::AddToRadioGroup() {
 | 
						|
  MOZ_ASSERT(!mRadioGroupContainer,
 | 
						|
             "Radio button must be removed from previous radio group container "
 | 
						|
             "before being added to another!");
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // If the element has no radio group container we can stop here.
 | 
						|
  auto* container = FindTreeRadioGroupContainer();
 | 
						|
  if (!container) {
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  nsAutoString name;
 | 
						|
  GetAttr(nsGkAtoms::name, name);
 | 
						|
  // If we are part of a radio group, the element must have a name.
 | 
						|
  MOZ_ASSERT(!name.IsEmpty());
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  //
 | 
						|
  // Add the radio to the radio group container.
 | 
						|
  //
 | 
						|
  container->AddToRadioGroup(name, this, mForm);
 | 
						|
  mRadioGroupContainer = container;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  //
 | 
						|
  // If the input element is checked, and we add it to the group, it will
 | 
						|
  // deselect whatever is currently selected in that group
 | 
						|
  //
 | 
						|
  if (mChecked) {
 | 
						|
    //
 | 
						|
    // If it is checked, call "RadioSetChecked" to perform the selection/
 | 
						|
    // deselection ritual.  This has the side effect of repainting the
 | 
						|
    // radio button, but as adding a checked radio button into the group
 | 
						|
    // should not be that common an occurrence, I think we can live with
 | 
						|
    // that.
 | 
						|
    // Make sure not to notify if we're still being created.
 | 
						|
    //
 | 
						|
    RadioSetChecked(mDoneCreating);
 | 
						|
  } else {
 | 
						|
    bool indeterminate = !container->GetCurrentRadioButton(name);
 | 
						|
    SetStates(ElementState::INDETERMINATE, indeterminate, mDoneCreating);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  //
 | 
						|
  // For integrity purposes, we have to ensure that "checkedChanged" is
 | 
						|
  // the same for this new element as for all the others in the group
 | 
						|
  //
 | 
						|
  bool checkedChanged = mCheckedChanged;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  nsCOMPtr<nsIRadioVisitor> visitor =
 | 
						|
      new nsRadioGetCheckedChangedVisitor(&checkedChanged, this);
 | 
						|
  VisitGroup(visitor);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  SetCheckedChangedInternal(checkedChanged);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // We initialize the validity of the element to the validity of the group
 | 
						|
  // because we assume UpdateValueMissingState() will be called after.
 | 
						|
  SetValidityState(VALIDITY_STATE_VALUE_MISSING,
 | 
						|
                   container->GetValueMissingState(name));
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::RemoveFromRadioGroup() {
 | 
						|
  auto* container = GetCurrentRadioGroupContainer();
 | 
						|
  if (!container) {
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  nsAutoString name;
 | 
						|
  GetAttr(nsGkAtoms::name, name);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // If this button was checked, we need to notify the group that there is no
 | 
						|
  // longer a selected radio button
 | 
						|
  if (mChecked) {
 | 
						|
    container->SetCurrentRadioButton(name, nullptr);
 | 
						|
    nsCOMPtr<nsIRadioVisitor> visitor = new nsRadioUpdateStateVisitor(this);
 | 
						|
    VisitGroup(visitor);
 | 
						|
  } else {
 | 
						|
    AddStates(ElementState::INDETERMINATE);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Remove this radio from its group in the container.
 | 
						|
  // We need to call UpdateValueMissingValidityStateForRadio before to make sure
 | 
						|
  // the group validity is updated (with this element being ignored).
 | 
						|
  UpdateValueMissingValidityStateForRadio(true);
 | 
						|
  container->RemoveFromRadioGroup(name, this);
 | 
						|
  mRadioGroupContainer = nullptr;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
bool HTMLInputElement::IsHTMLFocusable(IsFocusableFlags aFlags,
 | 
						|
                                       bool* aIsFocusable, int32_t* aTabIndex) {
 | 
						|
  if (nsGenericHTMLFormControlElementWithState::IsHTMLFocusable(
 | 
						|
          aFlags, aIsFocusable, aTabIndex)) {
 | 
						|
    return true;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (IsDisabled()) {
 | 
						|
    *aIsFocusable = false;
 | 
						|
    return true;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (IsSingleLineTextControl(false) || mType == FormControlType::InputRange) {
 | 
						|
    *aIsFocusable = true;
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  const bool defaultFocusable = IsFormControlDefaultFocusable(aFlags);
 | 
						|
  if (CreatesDateTimeWidget()) {
 | 
						|
    if (aTabIndex) {
 | 
						|
      // We only want our native anonymous child to be tabable to, not ourself.
 | 
						|
      *aTabIndex = -1;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    *aIsFocusable = true;
 | 
						|
    return true;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (mType == FormControlType::InputHidden) {
 | 
						|
    if (aTabIndex) {
 | 
						|
      *aTabIndex = -1;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    *aIsFocusable = false;
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (!aTabIndex) {
 | 
						|
    // The other controls are all focusable
 | 
						|
    *aIsFocusable = defaultFocusable;
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (mType != FormControlType::InputRadio) {
 | 
						|
    *aIsFocusable = defaultFocusable;
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (mChecked) {
 | 
						|
    // Selected radio buttons are tabbable
 | 
						|
    *aIsFocusable = defaultFocusable;
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Current radio button is not selected.
 | 
						|
  // Make it tabbable if nothing in group is selected and it is the first radio
 | 
						|
  // button.
 | 
						|
  auto* container = GetCurrentRadioGroupContainer();
 | 
						|
  if (!container) {
 | 
						|
    *aIsFocusable = defaultFocusable;
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  nsAutoString name;
 | 
						|
  GetAttr(nsGkAtoms::name, name);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // If there is a selected radio button but it is disabled or hidden, it
 | 
						|
  // shouldn't be considered as selected for this check. Otherwise, the entire
 | 
						|
  // group will be unreachable with the tab key.
 | 
						|
  HTMLInputElement* selectedRadio = container->GetCurrentRadioButton(name);
 | 
						|
  if ((selectedRadio && !selectedRadio->Disabled() &&
 | 
						|
       selectedRadio->GetPrimaryFrame()) ||
 | 
						|
      container->GetFirstRadioButton(name) != this) {
 | 
						|
    *aTabIndex = -1;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  *aIsFocusable = defaultFocusable;
 | 
						|
  return false;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
nsresult HTMLInputElement::VisitGroup(nsIRadioVisitor* aVisitor) {
 | 
						|
  if (auto* container = GetCurrentRadioGroupContainer()) {
 | 
						|
    nsAutoString name;
 | 
						|
    GetAttr(nsGkAtoms::name, name);
 | 
						|
    return container->WalkRadioGroup(name, aVisitor);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  aVisitor->Visit(this);
 | 
						|
  return NS_OK;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
HTMLInputElement::ValueModeType HTMLInputElement::GetValueMode() const {
 | 
						|
  switch (mType) {
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputHidden:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputSubmit:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputButton:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputReset:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputImage:
 | 
						|
      return VALUE_MODE_DEFAULT;
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputCheckbox:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputRadio:
 | 
						|
      return VALUE_MODE_DEFAULT_ON;
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputFile:
 | 
						|
      return VALUE_MODE_FILENAME;
 | 
						|
#ifdef DEBUG
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputText:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputPassword:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputSearch:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputTel:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputEmail:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputUrl:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputNumber:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputRange:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputDate:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputTime:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputColor:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputMonth:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputWeek:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputDatetimeLocal:
 | 
						|
      return VALUE_MODE_VALUE;
 | 
						|
    default:
 | 
						|
      MOZ_ASSERT_UNREACHABLE("Unexpected input type in GetValueMode()");
 | 
						|
      return VALUE_MODE_VALUE;
 | 
						|
#else   // DEBUG
 | 
						|
    default:
 | 
						|
      return VALUE_MODE_VALUE;
 | 
						|
#endif  // DEBUG
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
bool HTMLInputElement::IsMutable() const {
 | 
						|
  return !IsDisabled() &&
 | 
						|
         !(DoesReadWriteApply() && State().HasState(ElementState::READONLY));
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
bool HTMLInputElement::DoesRequiredApply() const {
 | 
						|
  switch (mType) {
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputHidden:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputButton:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputImage:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputReset:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputSubmit:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputRange:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputColor:
 | 
						|
      return false;
 | 
						|
#ifdef DEBUG
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputRadio:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputCheckbox:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputFile:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputText:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputPassword:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputSearch:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputTel:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputEmail:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputUrl:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputNumber:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputDate:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputTime:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputMonth:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputWeek:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputDatetimeLocal:
 | 
						|
      return true;
 | 
						|
    default:
 | 
						|
      MOZ_ASSERT_UNREACHABLE("Unexpected input type in DoesRequiredApply()");
 | 
						|
      return true;
 | 
						|
#else   // DEBUG
 | 
						|
    default:
 | 
						|
      return true;
 | 
						|
#endif  // DEBUG
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
bool HTMLInputElement::PlaceholderApplies() const {
 | 
						|
  if (IsDateTimeInputType(mType)) {
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return IsSingleLineTextControl(false);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
bool HTMLInputElement::DoesMinMaxApply() const {
 | 
						|
  switch (mType) {
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputNumber:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputDate:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputTime:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputRange:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputMonth:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputWeek:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputDatetimeLocal:
 | 
						|
      return true;
 | 
						|
#ifdef DEBUG
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputReset:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputSubmit:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputImage:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputButton:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputHidden:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputRadio:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputCheckbox:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputFile:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputText:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputPassword:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputSearch:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputTel:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputEmail:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputUrl:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputColor:
 | 
						|
      return false;
 | 
						|
    default:
 | 
						|
      MOZ_ASSERT_UNREACHABLE("Unexpected input type in DoesRequiredApply()");
 | 
						|
      return false;
 | 
						|
#else   // DEBUG
 | 
						|
    default:
 | 
						|
      return false;
 | 
						|
#endif  // DEBUG
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
bool HTMLInputElement::DoesAutocompleteApply() const {
 | 
						|
  switch (mType) {
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputHidden:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputText:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputSearch:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputUrl:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputTel:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputEmail:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputPassword:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputDate:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputTime:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputNumber:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputRange:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputColor:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputMonth:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputWeek:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputDatetimeLocal:
 | 
						|
      return true;
 | 
						|
#ifdef DEBUG
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputReset:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputSubmit:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputImage:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputButton:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputRadio:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputCheckbox:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputFile:
 | 
						|
      return false;
 | 
						|
    default:
 | 
						|
      MOZ_ASSERT_UNREACHABLE(
 | 
						|
          "Unexpected input type in DoesAutocompleteApply()");
 | 
						|
      return false;
 | 
						|
#else   // DEBUG
 | 
						|
    default:
 | 
						|
      return false;
 | 
						|
#endif  // DEBUG
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
Decimal HTMLInputElement::GetStep() const {
 | 
						|
  MOZ_ASSERT(DoesStepApply(), "GetStep() can only be called if @step applies");
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (!HasAttr(nsGkAtoms::step)) {
 | 
						|
    return GetDefaultStep() * GetStepScaleFactor();
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  nsAutoString stepStr;
 | 
						|
  GetAttr(nsGkAtoms::step, stepStr);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (stepStr.LowerCaseEqualsLiteral("any")) {
 | 
						|
    // The element can't suffer from step mismatch if there is no step.
 | 
						|
    return kStepAny;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  Decimal step = StringToDecimal(stepStr);
 | 
						|
  if (!step.isFinite() || step <= Decimal(0)) {
 | 
						|
    step = GetDefaultStep();
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // For input type=date, we round the step value to have a rounded day.
 | 
						|
  if (mType == FormControlType::InputDate ||
 | 
						|
      mType == FormControlType::InputMonth ||
 | 
						|
      mType == FormControlType::InputWeek) {
 | 
						|
    step = std::max(step.round(), Decimal(1));
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return step * GetStepScaleFactor();
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
// ConstraintValidation
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::SetCustomValidity(const nsAString& aError) {
 | 
						|
  ConstraintValidation::SetCustomValidity(aError);
 | 
						|
  UpdateValidityElementStates(true);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
bool HTMLInputElement::IsTooLong() {
 | 
						|
  if (!mValueChanged || !mLastValueChangeWasInteractive) {
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return mInputType->IsTooLong();
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
bool HTMLInputElement::IsTooShort() {
 | 
						|
  if (!mValueChanged || !mLastValueChangeWasInteractive) {
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return mInputType->IsTooShort();
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
bool HTMLInputElement::IsValueMissing() const {
 | 
						|
  // Should use UpdateValueMissingValidityStateForRadio() for type radio.
 | 
						|
  MOZ_ASSERT(mType != FormControlType::InputRadio);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return mInputType->IsValueMissing();
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
bool HTMLInputElement::HasTypeMismatch() const {
 | 
						|
  return mInputType->HasTypeMismatch();
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
Maybe<bool> HTMLInputElement::HasPatternMismatch() const {
 | 
						|
  return mInputType->HasPatternMismatch();
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
bool HTMLInputElement::IsRangeOverflow() const {
 | 
						|
  return mInputType->IsRangeOverflow();
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
bool HTMLInputElement::IsRangeUnderflow() const {
 | 
						|
  return mInputType->IsRangeUnderflow();
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
bool HTMLInputElement::ValueIsStepMismatch(const Decimal& aValue) const {
 | 
						|
  if (aValue.isNaN()) {
 | 
						|
    // The element can't suffer from step mismatch if its value isn't a
 | 
						|
    // number.
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  Decimal step = GetStep();
 | 
						|
  if (step == kStepAny) {
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Value has to be an integral multiple of step.
 | 
						|
  return NS_floorModulo(aValue - GetStepBase(), step) != Decimal(0);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
bool HTMLInputElement::HasStepMismatch() const {
 | 
						|
  return mInputType->HasStepMismatch();
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
bool HTMLInputElement::HasBadInput() const { return mInputType->HasBadInput(); }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::UpdateTooLongValidityState() {
 | 
						|
  SetValidityState(VALIDITY_STATE_TOO_LONG, IsTooLong());
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::UpdateTooShortValidityState() {
 | 
						|
  SetValidityState(VALIDITY_STATE_TOO_SHORT, IsTooShort());
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::UpdateValueMissingValidityStateForRadio(
 | 
						|
    bool aIgnoreSelf) {
 | 
						|
  MOZ_ASSERT(mType == FormControlType::InputRadio,
 | 
						|
             "This should be called only for radio input types");
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  HTMLInputElement* selection = GetSelectedRadioButton();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // If there is no selection, that might mean the radio is not in a group.
 | 
						|
  // In that case, we can look for the checked state of the radio.
 | 
						|
  bool selected = selection || (!aIgnoreSelf && mChecked);
 | 
						|
  bool required = !aIgnoreSelf && IsRequired();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  auto* container = GetCurrentRadioGroupContainer();
 | 
						|
  if (!container) {
 | 
						|
    SetValidityState(VALIDITY_STATE_VALUE_MISSING, false);
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  nsAutoString name;
 | 
						|
  GetAttr(nsGkAtoms::name, name);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // If the current radio is required and not ignored, we can assume the entire
 | 
						|
  // group is required.
 | 
						|
  if (!required) {
 | 
						|
    required = (aIgnoreSelf && IsRequired())
 | 
						|
                   ? container->GetRequiredRadioCount(name) - 1
 | 
						|
                   : container->GetRequiredRadioCount(name);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  bool valueMissing = required && !selected;
 | 
						|
  if (container->GetValueMissingState(name) != valueMissing) {
 | 
						|
    container->SetValueMissingState(name, valueMissing);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    SetValidityState(VALIDITY_STATE_VALUE_MISSING, valueMissing);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // nsRadioSetValueMissingState will call ElementStateChanged while visiting.
 | 
						|
    nsAutoScriptBlocker scriptBlocker;
 | 
						|
    nsCOMPtr<nsIRadioVisitor> visitor =
 | 
						|
        new nsRadioSetValueMissingState(this, valueMissing);
 | 
						|
    VisitGroup(visitor);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::UpdateValueMissingValidityState() {
 | 
						|
  if (mType == FormControlType::InputRadio) {
 | 
						|
    UpdateValueMissingValidityStateForRadio(false);
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  SetValidityState(VALIDITY_STATE_VALUE_MISSING, IsValueMissing());
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::UpdateTypeMismatchValidityState() {
 | 
						|
  SetValidityState(VALIDITY_STATE_TYPE_MISMATCH, HasTypeMismatch());
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::UpdatePatternMismatchValidityState() {
 | 
						|
  Maybe<bool> hasMismatch = HasPatternMismatch();
 | 
						|
  // Don't update if the JS engine failed to evaluate it.
 | 
						|
  if (hasMismatch.isSome()) {
 | 
						|
    SetValidityState(VALIDITY_STATE_PATTERN_MISMATCH, hasMismatch.value());
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::UpdateRangeOverflowValidityState() {
 | 
						|
  SetValidityState(VALIDITY_STATE_RANGE_OVERFLOW, IsRangeOverflow());
 | 
						|
  UpdateInRange(true);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::UpdateRangeUnderflowValidityState() {
 | 
						|
  SetValidityState(VALIDITY_STATE_RANGE_UNDERFLOW, IsRangeUnderflow());
 | 
						|
  UpdateInRange(true);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::UpdateStepMismatchValidityState() {
 | 
						|
  SetValidityState(VALIDITY_STATE_STEP_MISMATCH, HasStepMismatch());
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::UpdateBadInputValidityState() {
 | 
						|
  SetValidityState(VALIDITY_STATE_BAD_INPUT, HasBadInput());
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::UpdateAllValidityStates(bool aNotify) {
 | 
						|
  bool validBefore = IsValid();
 | 
						|
  UpdateAllValidityStatesButNotElementState();
 | 
						|
  if (validBefore != IsValid()) {
 | 
						|
    UpdateValidityElementStates(aNotify);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::UpdateAllValidityStatesButNotElementState() {
 | 
						|
  UpdateTooLongValidityState();
 | 
						|
  UpdateTooShortValidityState();
 | 
						|
  UpdateValueMissingValidityState();
 | 
						|
  UpdateTypeMismatchValidityState();
 | 
						|
  UpdatePatternMismatchValidityState();
 | 
						|
  UpdateRangeOverflowValidityState();
 | 
						|
  UpdateRangeUnderflowValidityState();
 | 
						|
  UpdateStepMismatchValidityState();
 | 
						|
  UpdateBadInputValidityState();
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::UpdateBarredFromConstraintValidation() {
 | 
						|
  // NOTE: readonly attribute causes an element to be barred from constraint
 | 
						|
  // validation even if it doesn't apply to that input type. That's rather
 | 
						|
  // weird, but pre-existing behavior.
 | 
						|
  bool wasCandidate = IsCandidateForConstraintValidation();
 | 
						|
  SetBarredFromConstraintValidation(
 | 
						|
      mType == FormControlType::InputHidden ||
 | 
						|
      mType == FormControlType::InputButton ||
 | 
						|
      mType == FormControlType::InputReset || IsDisabled() ||
 | 
						|
      HasAttr(nsGkAtoms::readonly) ||
 | 
						|
      HasFlag(ELEMENT_IS_DATALIST_OR_HAS_DATALIST_ANCESTOR));
 | 
						|
  if (IsCandidateForConstraintValidation() != wasCandidate) {
 | 
						|
    UpdateInRange(true);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
nsresult HTMLInputElement::GetValidationMessage(nsAString& aValidationMessage,
 | 
						|
                                                ValidityStateType aType) {
 | 
						|
  return mInputType->GetValidationMessage(aValidationMessage, aType);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
bool HTMLInputElement::IsSingleLineTextControl() const {
 | 
						|
  return IsSingleLineTextControl(false);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
bool HTMLInputElement::IsTextArea() const { return false; }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
bool HTMLInputElement::IsPasswordTextControl() const {
 | 
						|
  return mType == FormControlType::InputPassword;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
Maybe<int32_t> HTMLInputElement::GetNumberInputCols() const {
 | 
						|
  // This logic is ported from WebKit, see
 | 
						|
  // https://github.com/whatwg/html/issues/10390
 | 
						|
  struct RenderSize {
 | 
						|
    uint32_t mBeforeDecimal = 0;
 | 
						|
    uint32_t mAfterDecimal = 0;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    RenderSize Max(const RenderSize& aOther) const {
 | 
						|
      return {std::max(mBeforeDecimal, aOther.mBeforeDecimal),
 | 
						|
              std::max(mAfterDecimal, aOther.mAfterDecimal)};
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    static RenderSize From(const Decimal& aValue) {
 | 
						|
      MOZ_ASSERT(aValue.isFinite());
 | 
						|
      nsAutoCString tmp;
 | 
						|
      tmp.AppendInt(aValue.value().coefficient());
 | 
						|
      const uint32_t sizeOfDigits = tmp.Length();
 | 
						|
      const uint32_t sizeOfSign = aValue.isNegative() ? 1 : 0;
 | 
						|
      const int32_t exponent = aValue.exponent();
 | 
						|
      if (exponent >= 0) {
 | 
						|
        return {sizeOfSign + sizeOfDigits, 0};
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      const int32_t sizeBeforeDecimalPoint = exponent + int32_t(sizeOfDigits);
 | 
						|
      if (sizeBeforeDecimalPoint > 0) {
 | 
						|
        // In case of "123.456"
 | 
						|
        return {sizeOfSign + sizeBeforeDecimalPoint,
 | 
						|
                sizeOfDigits - sizeBeforeDecimalPoint};
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      // In case of "0.00012345"
 | 
						|
      const uint32_t sizeOfZero = 1;
 | 
						|
      const uint32_t numberOfZeroAfterDecimalPoint = -sizeBeforeDecimalPoint;
 | 
						|
      return {sizeOfSign + sizeOfZero,
 | 
						|
              numberOfZeroAfterDecimalPoint + sizeOfDigits};
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  };
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (mType != FormControlType::InputNumber) {
 | 
						|
    return {};
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  Decimal min = GetMinimum();
 | 
						|
  if (!min.isFinite()) {
 | 
						|
    return {};
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  Decimal max = GetMaximum();
 | 
						|
  if (!max.isFinite()) {
 | 
						|
    return {};
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  Decimal step = GetStep();
 | 
						|
  if (step == kStepAny) {
 | 
						|
    return {};
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  MOZ_ASSERT(step.isFinite());
 | 
						|
  RenderSize size = RenderSize::From(min).Max(
 | 
						|
      RenderSize::From(max).Max(RenderSize::From(step)));
 | 
						|
  return Some(size.mBeforeDecimal + size.mAfterDecimal +
 | 
						|
              (size.mAfterDecimal ? 1 : 0));
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
int32_t HTMLInputElement::GetCols() {
 | 
						|
  if (const nsAttrValue* attr = GetParsedAttr(nsGkAtoms::size);
 | 
						|
      attr && attr->Type() == nsAttrValue::eInteger) {
 | 
						|
    int32_t cols = attr->GetIntegerValue();
 | 
						|
    if (cols > 0) {
 | 
						|
      return cols;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (Maybe<int32_t> cols = GetNumberInputCols(); cols && *cols > 0) {
 | 
						|
    return *cols;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return DEFAULT_COLS;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
int32_t HTMLInputElement::GetWrapCols() {
 | 
						|
  return 0;  // only textarea's can have wrap cols
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
int32_t HTMLInputElement::GetRows() { return DEFAULT_ROWS; }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::GetDefaultValueFromContent(nsAString& aValue,
 | 
						|
                                                  bool aForDisplay) {
 | 
						|
  if (!GetEditorState()) {
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  GetDefaultValue(aValue);
 | 
						|
  // This is called by the frame to show the value.
 | 
						|
  // We have to sanitize it when needed.
 | 
						|
  // FIXME: Do we want to sanitize even when aForDisplay is false?
 | 
						|
  if (mDoneCreating) {
 | 
						|
    SanitizeValue(aValue, aForDisplay ? SanitizationKind::ForDisplay
 | 
						|
                                      : SanitizationKind::ForValueGetter);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
bool HTMLInputElement::ValueChanged() const { return mValueChanged; }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::GetTextEditorValue(nsAString& aValue) const {
 | 
						|
  if (TextControlState* state = GetEditorState()) {
 | 
						|
    state->GetValue(aValue, /* aIgnoreWrap = */ true, /* aForDisplay = */ true);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::InitializeKeyboardEventListeners() {
 | 
						|
  TextControlState* state = GetEditorState();
 | 
						|
  if (state) {
 | 
						|
    state->InitializeKeyboardEventListeners();
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::UpdatePlaceholderShownState() {
 | 
						|
  SetStates(ElementState::PLACEHOLDER_SHOWN,
 | 
						|
            IsValueEmpty() && PlaceholderApplies() &&
 | 
						|
                HasAttr(nsGkAtoms::placeholder));
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::OnValueChanged(ValueChangeKind aKind,
 | 
						|
                                      bool aNewValueEmpty,
 | 
						|
                                      const nsAString* aKnownNewValue) {
 | 
						|
  MOZ_ASSERT_IF(aKnownNewValue, aKnownNewValue->IsEmpty() == aNewValueEmpty);
 | 
						|
  if (aKind != ValueChangeKind::Internal) {
 | 
						|
    mLastValueChangeWasInteractive = aKind == ValueChangeKind::UserInteraction;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    if (State().HasState(ElementState::AUTOFILL)) {
 | 
						|
      RemoveStates(ElementState::AUTOFILL | ElementState::AUTOFILL_PREVIEW);
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (aNewValueEmpty != IsValueEmpty()) {
 | 
						|
    SetStates(ElementState::VALUE_EMPTY, aNewValueEmpty);
 | 
						|
    UpdatePlaceholderShownState();
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  UpdateAllValidityStates(true);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (HasDirAuto()) {
 | 
						|
    SetAutoDirectionality(true, aKnownNewValue);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
bool HTMLInputElement::HasCachedSelection() {
 | 
						|
  TextControlState* state = GetEditorState();
 | 
						|
  if (!state) {
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return state->IsSelectionCached() && state->HasNeverInitializedBefore() &&
 | 
						|
         state->GetSelectionProperties().GetStart() !=
 | 
						|
             state->GetSelectionProperties().GetEnd();
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::SetRevealPassword(bool aValue) {
 | 
						|
  if (NS_WARN_IF(mType != FormControlType::InputPassword)) {
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  if (aValue == State().HasState(ElementState::REVEALED)) {
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  RefPtr doc = OwnerDoc();
 | 
						|
  // We allow chrome code to prevent this. This is important for about:logins,
 | 
						|
  // which may need to run some OS-dependent authentication code before
 | 
						|
  // revealing the saved passwords.
 | 
						|
  bool defaultAction = true;
 | 
						|
  nsContentUtils::DispatchEventOnlyToChrome(
 | 
						|
      doc, this, u"MozWillToggleReveal"_ns, CanBubble::eYes, Cancelable::eYes,
 | 
						|
      &defaultAction);
 | 
						|
  if (NS_WARN_IF(!defaultAction)) {
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  SetStates(ElementState::REVEALED, aValue);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
bool HTMLInputElement::RevealPassword() const {
 | 
						|
  if (NS_WARN_IF(mType != FormControlType::InputPassword)) {
 | 
						|
    return false;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  return State().HasState(ElementState::REVEALED);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::FieldSetDisabledChanged(bool aNotify) {
 | 
						|
  // This *has* to be called *before* UpdateBarredFromConstraintValidation and
 | 
						|
  // UpdateValueMissingValidityState because these two functions depend on our
 | 
						|
  // disabled state.
 | 
						|
  nsGenericHTMLFormControlElementWithState::FieldSetDisabledChanged(aNotify);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  UpdateValueMissingValidityState();
 | 
						|
  UpdateBarredFromConstraintValidation();
 | 
						|
  UpdateValidityElementStates(aNotify);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::SetFilePickerFiltersFromAccept(
 | 
						|
    nsIFilePicker* filePicker) {
 | 
						|
  // We always add |filterAll|
 | 
						|
  filePicker->AppendFilters(nsIFilePicker::filterAll);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  NS_ASSERTION(HasAttr(nsGkAtoms::accept),
 | 
						|
               "You should not call SetFilePickerFiltersFromAccept if the"
 | 
						|
               " element has no accept attribute!");
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Services to retrieve image/*, audio/*, video/* filters
 | 
						|
  nsCOMPtr<nsIStringBundleService> stringService =
 | 
						|
      components::StringBundle::Service();
 | 
						|
  if (!stringService) {
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  nsCOMPtr<nsIStringBundle> filterBundle;
 | 
						|
  if (NS_FAILED(stringService->CreateBundle(
 | 
						|
          "chrome://global/content/filepicker.properties",
 | 
						|
          getter_AddRefs(filterBundle)))) {
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Service to retrieve mime type information for mime types filters
 | 
						|
  nsCOMPtr<nsIMIMEService> mimeService = do_GetService("@mozilla.org/mime;1");
 | 
						|
  if (!mimeService) {
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  nsAutoString accept;
 | 
						|
  GetAttr(nsGkAtoms::accept, accept);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  HTMLSplitOnSpacesTokenizer tokenizer(accept, ',');
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  nsTArray<nsFilePickerFilter> filters;
 | 
						|
  nsString allExtensionsList;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Retrieve all filters
 | 
						|
  while (tokenizer.hasMoreTokens()) {
 | 
						|
    const nsDependentSubstring& token = tokenizer.nextToken();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    if (token.IsEmpty()) {
 | 
						|
      continue;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    int32_t filterMask = 0;
 | 
						|
    nsString filterName;
 | 
						|
    nsString extensionListStr;
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // First, check for image/audio/video filters...
 | 
						|
    if (token.EqualsLiteral("image/*")) {
 | 
						|
      filterMask = nsIFilePicker::filterImages;
 | 
						|
      filterBundle->GetStringFromName("imageFilter", extensionListStr);
 | 
						|
    } else if (token.EqualsLiteral("audio/*")) {
 | 
						|
      filterMask = nsIFilePicker::filterAudio;
 | 
						|
      filterBundle->GetStringFromName("audioFilter", extensionListStr);
 | 
						|
    } else if (token.EqualsLiteral("video/*")) {
 | 
						|
      filterMask = nsIFilePicker::filterVideo;
 | 
						|
      filterBundle->GetStringFromName("videoFilter", extensionListStr);
 | 
						|
    } else if (token.First() == '.') {
 | 
						|
      if (token.Contains(';') || token.Contains('*')) {
 | 
						|
        // Ignore this filter as it contains reserved characters
 | 
						|
        continue;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      extensionListStr = u"*"_ns + token;
 | 
						|
      filterName = extensionListStr;
 | 
						|
    } else {
 | 
						|
      //... if no image/audio/video filter is found, check mime types filters
 | 
						|
      nsCOMPtr<nsIMIMEInfo> mimeInfo;
 | 
						|
      if (NS_FAILED(
 | 
						|
              mimeService->GetFromTypeAndExtension(NS_ConvertUTF16toUTF8(token),
 | 
						|
                                                   ""_ns,  // No extension
 | 
						|
                                                   getter_AddRefs(mimeInfo))) ||
 | 
						|
          !mimeInfo) {
 | 
						|
        continue;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      // Get a name for the filter: first try the description, then the mime
 | 
						|
      // type name if there is no description
 | 
						|
      mimeInfo->GetDescription(filterName);
 | 
						|
      if (filterName.IsEmpty()) {
 | 
						|
        nsCString mimeTypeName;
 | 
						|
        mimeInfo->GetType(mimeTypeName);
 | 
						|
        CopyUTF8toUTF16(mimeTypeName, filterName);
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      // Get extension list
 | 
						|
      nsCOMPtr<nsIUTF8StringEnumerator> extensions;
 | 
						|
      mimeInfo->GetFileExtensions(getter_AddRefs(extensions));
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
      bool hasMore;
 | 
						|
      while (NS_SUCCEEDED(extensions->HasMore(&hasMore)) && hasMore) {
 | 
						|
        nsCString extension;
 | 
						|
        if (NS_FAILED(extensions->GetNext(extension))) {
 | 
						|
          continue;
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
        if (!extensionListStr.IsEmpty()) {
 | 
						|
          extensionListStr.AppendLiteral("; ");
 | 
						|
        }
 | 
						|
        extensionListStr += u"*."_ns + NS_ConvertUTF8toUTF16(extension);
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    if (!filterMask && (extensionListStr.IsEmpty() || filterName.IsEmpty())) {
 | 
						|
      // No valid filter found
 | 
						|
      continue;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // At this point we're sure the token represents a valid filter, so pass
 | 
						|
    // it directly as a raw filter.
 | 
						|
    filePicker->AppendRawFilter(token);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    // If we arrived here, that means we have a valid filter: let's create it
 | 
						|
    // and add it to our list, if no similar filter is already present
 | 
						|
    nsFilePickerFilter filter;
 | 
						|
    if (filterMask) {
 | 
						|
      filter = nsFilePickerFilter(filterMask);
 | 
						|
    } else {
 | 
						|
      filter = nsFilePickerFilter(filterName, extensionListStr);
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    if (!filters.Contains(filter)) {
 | 
						|
      if (!allExtensionsList.IsEmpty()) {
 | 
						|
        allExtensionsList.AppendLiteral("; ");
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      allExtensionsList += extensionListStr;
 | 
						|
      filters.AppendElement(filter);
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Remove similar filters
 | 
						|
  // Iterate over a copy, as we might modify the original filters list
 | 
						|
  const nsTArray<nsFilePickerFilter> filtersCopy = filters.Clone();
 | 
						|
  for (uint32_t i = 0; i < filtersCopy.Length(); ++i) {
 | 
						|
    const nsFilePickerFilter& filterToCheck = filtersCopy[i];
 | 
						|
    if (filterToCheck.mFilterMask) {
 | 
						|
      continue;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    for (uint32_t j = 0; j < filtersCopy.Length(); ++j) {
 | 
						|
      if (i == j) {
 | 
						|
        continue;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
      // Check if this filter's extension list is a substring of the other one.
 | 
						|
      // e.g. if filters are "*.jpeg" and "*.jpeg; *.jpg" the first one should
 | 
						|
      // be removed.
 | 
						|
      // Add an extra "; " to be sure the check will work and avoid cases like
 | 
						|
      // "*.xls" being a subtring of "*.xslx" while those are two differents
 | 
						|
      // filters and none should be removed.
 | 
						|
      if (FindInReadable(filterToCheck.mFilter + u";"_ns,
 | 
						|
                         filtersCopy[j].mFilter + u";"_ns)) {
 | 
						|
        // We already have a similar, less restrictive filter (i.e.
 | 
						|
        // filterToCheck extensionList is just a subset of another filter
 | 
						|
        // extension list): remove this one
 | 
						|
        filters.RemoveElement(filterToCheck);
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Add "All Supported Types" filter
 | 
						|
  if (filters.Length() > 1) {
 | 
						|
    nsAutoString title;
 | 
						|
    nsContentUtils::GetLocalizedString(nsContentUtils::eFORMS_PROPERTIES,
 | 
						|
                                       "AllSupportedTypes", title);
 | 
						|
    filePicker->AppendFilter(title, allExtensionsList);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Add each filter
 | 
						|
  for (uint32_t i = 0; i < filters.Length(); ++i) {
 | 
						|
    const nsFilePickerFilter& filter = filters[i];
 | 
						|
    if (filter.mFilterMask) {
 | 
						|
      filePicker->AppendFilters(filter.mFilterMask);
 | 
						|
    } else {
 | 
						|
      filePicker->AppendFilter(filter.mTitle, filter.mFilter);
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (filters.Length() >= 1) {
 | 
						|
    // |filterAll| will always use index=0 so we need to set index=1 as the
 | 
						|
    // current filter. This will be "All Supported Types" for multiple filters.
 | 
						|
    filePicker->SetFilterIndex(1);
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
Decimal HTMLInputElement::GetStepScaleFactor() const {
 | 
						|
  MOZ_ASSERT(DoesStepApply());
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  switch (mType) {
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputDate:
 | 
						|
      return kStepScaleFactorDate;
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputNumber:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputRange:
 | 
						|
      return kStepScaleFactorNumberRange;
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputTime:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputDatetimeLocal:
 | 
						|
      return kStepScaleFactorTime;
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputMonth:
 | 
						|
      return kStepScaleFactorMonth;
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputWeek:
 | 
						|
      return kStepScaleFactorWeek;
 | 
						|
    default:
 | 
						|
      MOZ_ASSERT(false, "Unrecognized input type");
 | 
						|
      return Decimal::nan();
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
Decimal HTMLInputElement::GetDefaultStep() const {
 | 
						|
  MOZ_ASSERT(DoesStepApply());
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  switch (mType) {
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputDate:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputMonth:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputWeek:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputNumber:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputRange:
 | 
						|
      return kDefaultStep;
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputTime:
 | 
						|
    case FormControlType::InputDatetimeLocal:
 | 
						|
      return kDefaultStepTime;
 | 
						|
    default:
 | 
						|
      MOZ_ASSERT(false, "Unrecognized input type");
 | 
						|
      return Decimal::nan();
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::SetUserInteracted(bool aInteracted) {
 | 
						|
  if (mUserInteracted == aInteracted) {
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  mUserInteracted = aInteracted;
 | 
						|
  UpdateValidityElementStates(true);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::UpdateInRange(bool aNotify) {
 | 
						|
  AutoStateChangeNotifier notifier(*this, aNotify);
 | 
						|
  RemoveStatesSilently(ElementState::INRANGE | ElementState::OUTOFRANGE);
 | 
						|
  if (!mHasRange || !IsCandidateForConstraintValidation()) {
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
  bool outOfRange = GetValidityState(VALIDITY_STATE_RANGE_OVERFLOW) ||
 | 
						|
                    GetValidityState(VALIDITY_STATE_RANGE_UNDERFLOW);
 | 
						|
  AddStatesSilently(outOfRange ? ElementState::OUTOFRANGE
 | 
						|
                               : ElementState::INRANGE);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::UpdateHasRange(bool aNotify) {
 | 
						|
  // There is a range if min/max applies for the type and if the element
 | 
						|
  // currently have a valid min or max.
 | 
						|
  const bool newHasRange = [&] {
 | 
						|
    if (!DoesMinMaxApply()) {
 | 
						|
      return false;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
    return !GetMinimum().isNaN() || !GetMaximum().isNaN();
 | 
						|
  }();
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (newHasRange == mHasRange) {
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  mHasRange = newHasRange;
 | 
						|
  UpdateInRange(aNotify);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::PickerClosed() { mPickerRunning = false; }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
JSObject* HTMLInputElement::WrapNode(JSContext* aCx,
 | 
						|
                                     JS::Handle<JSObject*> aGivenProto) {
 | 
						|
  return HTMLInputElement_Binding::Wrap(aCx, this, aGivenProto);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
GetFilesHelper* HTMLInputElement::GetOrCreateGetFilesHelper(bool aRecursiveFlag,
 | 
						|
                                                            ErrorResult& aRv) {
 | 
						|
  MOZ_ASSERT(mFileData);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (aRecursiveFlag) {
 | 
						|
    if (!mFileData->mGetFilesRecursiveHelper) {
 | 
						|
      mFileData->mGetFilesRecursiveHelper = GetFilesHelper::Create(
 | 
						|
          GetFilesOrDirectoriesInternal(), aRecursiveFlag, aRv);
 | 
						|
      if (NS_WARN_IF(aRv.Failed())) {
 | 
						|
        return nullptr;
 | 
						|
      }
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    return mFileData->mGetFilesRecursiveHelper;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  if (!mFileData->mGetFilesNonRecursiveHelper) {
 | 
						|
    mFileData->mGetFilesNonRecursiveHelper = GetFilesHelper::Create(
 | 
						|
        GetFilesOrDirectoriesInternal(), aRecursiveFlag, aRv);
 | 
						|
    if (NS_WARN_IF(aRv.Failed())) {
 | 
						|
      return nullptr;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return mFileData->mGetFilesNonRecursiveHelper;
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::UpdateEntries(
 | 
						|
    const nsTArray<OwningFileOrDirectory>& aFilesOrDirectories) {
 | 
						|
  MOZ_ASSERT(mFileData && mFileData->mEntries.IsEmpty());
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  nsCOMPtr<nsIGlobalObject> global = OwnerDoc()->GetScopeObject();
 | 
						|
  MOZ_ASSERT(global);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  RefPtr<FileSystem> fs = FileSystem::Create(global);
 | 
						|
  if (NS_WARN_IF(!fs)) {
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  Sequence<RefPtr<FileSystemEntry>> entries;
 | 
						|
  for (uint32_t i = 0; i < aFilesOrDirectories.Length(); ++i) {
 | 
						|
    RefPtr<FileSystemEntry> entry =
 | 
						|
        FileSystemEntry::Create(global, aFilesOrDirectories[i], fs);
 | 
						|
    MOZ_ASSERT(entry);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
    if (!entries.AppendElement(entry, fallible)) {
 | 
						|
      return;
 | 
						|
    }
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // The root fileSystem is a DirectoryEntry object that contains only the
 | 
						|
  // dropped fileEntry and directoryEntry objects.
 | 
						|
  fs->CreateRoot(entries);
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  mFileData->mEntries = std::move(entries);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::GetWebkitEntries(
 | 
						|
    nsTArray<RefPtr<FileSystemEntry>>& aSequence) {
 | 
						|
  if (NS_WARN_IF(mType != FormControlType::InputFile)) {
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  Telemetry::Accumulate(Telemetry::BLINK_FILESYSTEM_USED, true);
 | 
						|
  aSequence.AppendElements(mFileData->mEntries);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
already_AddRefed<nsINodeList> HTMLInputElement::GetLabels() {
 | 
						|
  if (!IsLabelable()) {
 | 
						|
    return nullptr;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  return nsGenericHTMLElement::Labels();
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
void HTMLInputElement::MaybeFireInputPasswordRemoved() {
 | 
						|
  // We want this event to be fired only when the password field is removed
 | 
						|
  // from the DOM tree, not when it is released (ex, tab is closed). So don't
 | 
						|
  // fire an event when the password input field doesn't have a docshell.
 | 
						|
  Document* doc = GetComposedDoc();
 | 
						|
  nsIDocShell* container = doc ? doc->GetDocShell() : nullptr;
 | 
						|
  if (!container) {
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  // Right now, only the password manager listens to the event and only listen
 | 
						|
  // to it under certain circumstances. So don't fire this event unless
 | 
						|
  // necessary.
 | 
						|
  if (!doc->ShouldNotifyFormOrPasswordRemoved()) {
 | 
						|
    return;
 | 
						|
  }
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
  AsyncEventDispatcher::RunDOMEventWhenSafe(
 | 
						|
      *this, u"DOMInputPasswordRemoved"_ns, CanBubble::eNo,
 | 
						|
      ChromeOnlyDispatch::eYes);
 | 
						|
}
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
}  // namespace mozilla::dom
 | 
						|
 | 
						|
#undef NS_ORIGINAL_CHECKED_VALUE
 |